1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_inset Index idx
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3777 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3779 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3780 to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3785 \begin_layout Standard
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3807 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3808 You can choose between the following five options:
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Use default page style of current class.
3820 \begin_layout Labeling
3821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 No page numbers or headings.
3829 \begin_layout Labeling
3830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_layout Labeling
3839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3844 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3845 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3846 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3856 have the LaTeX-package
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3871 How they are defined is explained in section
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3878 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3887 \begin_inset space ~
3891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3893 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3900 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 Paper Size and Orientation
3902 \begin_inset Index idx
3905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 Document ! Paper size
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 You can find the following options in the menu
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3936 \begin_inset Index idx
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 What size paper to print on.
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3990 US letter, US legal, US executive
3993 \begin_layout Itemize
3999 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 To choose whether to output as
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4033 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4034 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4037 \begin_layout Subsection
4039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 Paper margins are set in the menu
4071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4089 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4090 the paper format and the font size into account.
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4103 That includes the paragraph environments.
4104 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4105 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4106 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4107 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4118 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4119 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4120 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4123 \begin_layout Section
4124 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4129 Paragraph ! Indentation
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4141 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4150 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4153 \begin_layout Standard
4154 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4155 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4156 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4157 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4161 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4167 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4168 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4169 language than English.
4170 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4176 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4178 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4179 LyX takes care of that.
4180 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4182 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4183 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4184 of a page, and so on.
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4194 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4195 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4199 these pre-coded spacings.
4200 We will explain more later.
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paragraph Separation
4205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4207 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4212 \begin_inset Index idx
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 Paragraph ! Separation
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4251 \begin_inset Index idx
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset space ~
4278 dialog and toggle the
4281 \begin_inset space ~
4286 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4289 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4293 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4294 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4300 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4303 \begin_layout Subsection
4305 \begin_inset Index idx
4308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4364 installed to use this feature.
4369 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset space ~
4378 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4379 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4382 \begin_layout Section
4383 Paragraph Environments
4384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4386 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 Paragraph ! Environments
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 Paragraph environments|(
4413 \begin_layout Subsection
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset Newline newline
4443 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4444 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4445 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4454 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 A paragraph environment is simply a
4459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4466 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4467 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4468 scheme, labels, and so on.
4469 Additionally, you can
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4478 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4479 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4480 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4482 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4484 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4489 \begin_inset Graphics
4490 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4496 at the left end of the toolbar.
4497 LyX will change the environment of the
4501 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4502 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4503 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4516 create a new paragraph using the
4520 paragraph environment.
4522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4529 because if you are in one of these environments:
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4579 , rather than resetting it to
4584 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4591 reference "sec:Nesting"
4598 \begin_layout Subsection
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 The default paragraph environment is
4608 It creates a plain paragraph.
4609 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4610 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4611 this manual) are in the
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 You can nest a paragraph using the
4623 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_inset Index idx
4636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4655 for thanks or contact information.
4656 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4657 page along with today's date.
4658 For other types of documents, the title
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4685 Here's how you use them:
4688 \begin_layout Itemize
4689 Put the title of your document in the
4696 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 Put the author name in the
4704 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4706 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4712 Note that using this environment is optional.
4713 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4714 If you don't want a date, use the option
4716 Suppress default date on front page
4720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 \begin_inset space ~
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 You can use footnotes to insert
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 or contact information.
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4766 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Section headings ! Numbered
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Enumerate
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4832 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4833 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4838 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4839 You group the book into chapters.
4840 LyX does a similar grouping:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 is divided into either
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 Not all document types use the
4932 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4937 is the top-level heading.
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4950 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4951 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4953 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 \begin_inset Index idx
4970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The unnumbered section headings have a
4981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4988 at the end of their name.
4989 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4990 the table of contents, see section
4991 \begin_inset space ~
4995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 Changing the Numbering
5006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5008 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5017 in the Table of Contents.
5018 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5020 Just as certain classes start with
5034 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5044 This is something you can change.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5075 you will see two counters.
5080 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5082 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Short Titles of Headings
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Short titles
5098 \begin_inset Argument 1
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5110 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5117 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5119 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5120 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5121 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5126 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5127 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5128 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5139 This will insert a box labeled
5140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5144 \begin_inset space ~
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5151 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5152 This also works for captions inside floats.
5153 There can only be one short title per title.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 The following information applies to all section headings:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5184 \begin_layout Subsection
5185 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5189 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5203 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5204 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5205 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5206 the text they contain.
5207 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5215 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5228 when you start a new paragraph.
5229 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5233 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5234 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5235 have to change back to the
5239 environment yourself.
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 \begin_inset Index idx
5254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5264 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5265 time for the differences.
5274 are identical except for one difference:
5278 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5287 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5291 Here's an example of the
5304 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5306 See – no indentation!
5310 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5311 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5312 the other paragraph.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 Here's another example, this time in the
5323 \begin_layout Quotation
5329 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5330 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5331 the first line, then
5335 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5339 you were quoting other text.
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5343 Here's a new paragraph.
5344 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5345 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5348 \begin_layout Standard
5349 As the examples show,
5353 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5354 They should put quotes in the
5359 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5363 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5368 \begin_inset Index idx
5371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5402 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5408 \begin_inset Newline newline
5411 Which I did not rehearse!
5415 It could be much worse.
5416 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5418 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5419 indented a bit more than the first.
5420 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5426 \begin_inset Newline newline
5429 And make things look fine
5430 \begin_inset Newline newline
5436 arg "newline-insert newline"
5442 \begin_layout Standard
5447 does not indent both margins.
5448 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5449 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5456 arg "newline-insert newline"
5462 \begin_layout Subsection
5464 \begin_inset Index idx
5467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5483 \begin_layout Standard
5484 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5494 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5503 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5504 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5505 describing some general features of all four of them.
5508 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5512 \begin_layout Standard
5513 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5515 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5524 reset the environment to
5528 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5529 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5530 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5534 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5538 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5545 \begin_layout Standard
5546 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5547 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5549 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5550 you read all of section
5551 \begin_inset space ~
5555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5557 reference "sec:Nesting"
5564 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5566 \begin_inset Index idx
5569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5590 paragraph environment.
5591 It has the following properties:
5594 \begin_layout Itemize
5595 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5600 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5603 \begin_layout Itemize
5604 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5608 \begin_layout Itemize
5609 The items can have any length.
5610 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5611 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5618 \begin_layout Itemize
5623 environment inside another
5627 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5631 \begin_layout Itemize
5632 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5636 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5639 \begin_layout Itemize
5641 \begin_inset space ~
5645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5647 reference "sec:Nesting"
5651 for a full explanation of nesting.
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5656 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5665 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5668 \begin_layout Standard
5669 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5670 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5673 \begin_layout Itemize
5674 The label for the first level
5678 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5682 \begin_layout Itemize
5683 The label for the second level is a dash.
5687 \begin_layout Itemize
5688 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5692 \begin_layout Itemize
5693 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5697 \begin_layout Itemize
5698 Back out to the third level.
5702 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 Back to the second level.
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5708 Back to the outermost level.
5711 \begin_layout Standard
5712 These are the default labels for an
5717 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5719 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5722 dialog in the submenu
5727 \begin_inset Index idx
5730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5736 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5739 \begin_layout Standard
5740 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5741 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5743 \begin_inset space ~
5747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5749 reference "sec:Nesting"
5756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5758 \begin_inset Index idx
5761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5770 name "sec:Enumerate"
5777 \begin_layout Standard
5782 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5783 It has these properties:
5786 \begin_layout Enumerate
5787 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5791 \begin_layout Enumerate
5792 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5796 \begin_layout Enumerate
5797 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5800 \begin_layout Enumerate
5805 environment resets the counter to one.
5808 \begin_layout Enumerate
5821 \begin_layout Enumerate
5822 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5823 Items can have any length.
5826 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5830 \begin_layout Enumerate
5831 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5834 \begin_layout Enumerate
5835 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5839 \begin_layout Standard
5848 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5849 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5856 \begin_layout Enumerate
5857 The first level of an
5861 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5865 \begin_layout Enumerate
5866 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5870 \begin_layout Enumerate
5871 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5879 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5885 \begin_layout Enumerate
5886 Back to the third level
5890 \begin_layout Enumerate
5891 Back to the second level.
5895 \begin_layout Enumerate
5896 Back to the outermost level.
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5900 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5904 environment, see section
5905 \begin_inset space ~
5909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5911 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5916 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5920 There is more to nesting
5924 environments than we've stated here.
5925 You should read section
5926 \begin_inset space ~
5930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5932 reference "sec:Nesting"
5936 to learn more about nesting.
5939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5941 \begin_inset Index idx
5944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5958 list has no fixed label.
5959 Instead, LyX uses the first
5960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5967 of the first line as the label.
5971 \begin_layout Description
5972 Example: This is an example of the
5979 \begin_layout Standard
5980 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5984 \begin_layout Standard
5986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5993 it is meant that the first usage of the
5997 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5999 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6007 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6012 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6013 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6015 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset space ~
6025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6027 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6031 for more information.) Here is an example:
6034 \begin_layout Description
6036 \begin_inset space ~
6039 Example: This one shows how to use a
6042 \begin_inset space ~
6054 \begin_layout Description
6055 Usage: You should use the
6059 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6060 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6062 It's not a good idea to use a
6066 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6067 You're better off using
6079 paragraphs into them.
6082 \begin_layout Description
6083 Nesting: You can nest
6087 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6091 \begin_layout Standard
6092 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6093 them from the first line.
6096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6098 \begin_inset Index idx
6101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6110 \begin_layout Standard
6115 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6118 \begin_layout Standard
6127 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6129 Here are its properties:
6132 \begin_layout Labeling
6133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6135 \begin_inset space ~
6138 labels LyX uses the first
6139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6146 of each line as the item label.
6151 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6152 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6153 space as described above.
6156 \begin_layout Labeling
6157 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6158 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6159 the body of the item text.
6160 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6161 label width plus a little extra space.
6165 \begin_layout Labeling
6166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6168 \begin_inset space ~
6171 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6173 If the label width is larger, the label
6174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6181 into the first line.
6182 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6183 margin of the rest of the item text.
6186 \begin_layout Labeling
6187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6189 \begin_inset space ~
6192 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6197 environment has the same left margin.
6198 \begin_inset Newline newline
6201 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6204 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6206 \begin_inset space ~
6211 dialog (toolbar button
6214 arg "layout-paragraph"
6221 \begin_inset space ~
6226 determines the default label width.
6227 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6236 multiple times instead.
6237 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6246 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6249 \begin_inset space ~
6254 every time you alter a label in a
6259 \begin_inset Newline newline
6262 The predefined default width is the length of
6263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6277 \begin_layout Standard
6282 list the same way as the
6286 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6292 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6296 \begin_layout Standard
6301 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6302 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6304 \begin_inset space ~
6308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6310 reference "sec:Nesting"
6314 to learn about nesting.
6317 \begin_layout Standard
6318 There is yet another feature of the
6322 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6324 You can use additional
6328 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6333 are documented in section
6334 \begin_inset space ~
6338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6340 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6345 Here are some examples:
6348 \begin_layout Labeling
6349 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6350 Left The default for
6357 \begin_layout Labeling
6358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6359 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6366 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6369 \begin_layout Labeling
6370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6371 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6375 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6382 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6385 \begin_layout Subsection
6387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6389 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6394 \begin_inset Index idx
6397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6406 \begin_layout Standard
6407 The features described in this section require that the module
6409 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6411 is loaded in the document settings.
6412 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6417 \begin_inset Index idx
6420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6421 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6429 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6430 Custom Enumerate Lists
6431 \begin_inset Index idx
6434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6435 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6443 \begin_layout Standard
6445 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6448 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6451 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6452 There you add the command
6455 \begin_layout Standard
6463 \begin_layout Standard
6464 in TeX Code (shortcut
6474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6475 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6476 \begin_inset space ~
6480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6482 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6495 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6502 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6503 For capital Roman numerals replace
6515 in the command above.
6516 For Arabic numerals use
6524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6531 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6556 You can only number 26
6557 \begin_inset space ~
6560 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6568 \begin_layout Standard
6569 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6570 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6577 \begin_layout Enumerate
6578 \begin_inset Argument 1
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6607 \begin_layout Enumerate
6608 \begin_inset Argument 1
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6634 \begin_layout Enumerate
6639 \begin_layout Enumerate
6640 \begin_inset Argument 1
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6667 \begin_layout Enumerate
6668 \begin_inset Argument 1
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6698 For this list these commands were used:
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6712 \begin_inset Newline newline
6720 \begin_inset Newline newline
6728 \begin_inset Newline newline
6738 \begin_layout Standard
6745 makes the label emphasized and
6754 \begin_layout Standard
6755 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6763 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6764 lists until you change the definition.
6772 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6774 \begin_inset Index idx
6777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6786 \begin_layout Standard
6787 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6790 \begin_layout Enumerate
6791 \begin_inset Argument 1
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 \begin_inset Note Note
6816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 goes back to default numbering
6825 \begin_layout Enumerate
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6833 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6837 \begin_layout Standard
6838 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6843 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6844 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6864 \begin_layout Standard
6865 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6867 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6868 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6869 of a normal enumeration.
6870 There, insert the command
6873 \begin_layout Standard
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6884 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6892 \begin_layout Enumerate
6896 \begin_layout Standard
6897 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6920 This enumeration starts at 4
6923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6925 \begin_inset Index idx
6928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6938 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6940 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6943 \begin_layout Itemize
6947 \begin_layout Itemize
6948 with standard spacing
6951 \begin_layout Standard
6952 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6954 Add there the command
6958 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6961 \begin_layout Itemize
6962 \begin_inset Argument 1
6965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6984 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \begin_layout Itemize
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6993 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6999 \begin_inset Index idx
7002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7003 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7009 For more information see its documentation,
7010 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7019 \begin_layout Standard
7020 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7022 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7023 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7027 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7030 \begin_layout Enumerate
7031 \begin_inset Argument 1
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7042 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7055 \begin_layout Enumerate
7056 with negative indentation
7059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7060 Further Customization
7061 \begin_inset Index idx
7064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 Lists ! Customization
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7074 You can also change the style of description lists.
7078 \begin_layout Standard
7084 \begin_layout Standard
7085 changes the description label font, the command
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7095 sets the list style.
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 An example where the command
7102 \begin_layout Standard
7107 itshape, style=nextline
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7114 \begin_layout Description
7116 \begin_inset space ~
7120 \begin_inset Argument 1
7123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7129 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7131 itshape, style=nextline
7141 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7142 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7146 \begin_layout Description
7148 \begin_inset space ~
7151 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7152 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7153 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7156 \begin_layout Standard
7157 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7163 \begin_inset Index idx
7166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7167 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7173 For more information see its documentation
7174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7183 \begin_layout Subsection
7185 \begin_inset Index idx
7188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7199 \begin_inset space ~
7202 Address: An Overview
7205 \begin_layout Standard
7206 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7214 \begin_inset space ~
7220 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7221 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7222 In contrast, you can use the
7229 \begin_inset space ~
7234 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7235 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7239 \begin_layout Standard
7240 Of course, you're not limited to using
7247 \begin_inset space ~
7256 \begin_inset space ~
7261 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7262 some European academic papers.
7265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7269 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7276 \begin_layout Standard
7281 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7282 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7286 \begin_inset space ~
7291 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7292 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7293 Here's an example of each:
7296 \begin_layout Right Address
7298 \begin_inset Newline newline
7302 \begin_inset Newline newline
7306 \begin_inset Newline newline
7309 When is it? What is today?
7312 \begin_layout Standard
7316 \begin_inset space ~
7322 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7323 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7324 Here's an example of the
7331 \begin_layout Address
7333 \begin_inset Newline newline
7336 Where do I send this
7337 \begin_inset Newline newline
7340 Your post office and country
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7344 As you can see, both
7351 \begin_inset space ~
7356 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7361 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7367 This makes sense, since
7375 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7376 Thus, you have to use
7383 arg "newline-insert newline"
7388 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7389 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7395 \begin_inset space ~
7400 ) to start a new line in an
7407 \begin_inset space ~
7415 \begin_layout Subsection
7419 \begin_layout Standard
7420 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7421 or list of references.
7422 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7427 \begin_inset Index idx
7430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 \begin_layout Standard
7444 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7445 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7446 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7447 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7461 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7462 The book document classes ignores the
7466 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7470 in a letter document class.
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7478 environment does several things for you.
7479 First, it puts the centered label
7480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7488 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7490 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7491 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7492 the subsequent text.
7493 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7494 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7498 \begin_layout Standard
7499 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7503 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7504 The new paragraph will still be in the
7509 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7510 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7514 \begin_inset Float figure
7519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7521 \begin_inset Graphics
7522 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7530 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7535 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7556 \begin_layout Standard
7557 We would love to demonstrate the
7561 environment, but since this document is in the
7562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7569 class, we can't do this.
7570 We inserted it therefore as figure
7571 \begin_inset space ~
7575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7577 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7582 If you have never heard of an
7583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7590 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7593 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7595 \begin_inset Index idx
7598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7607 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7619 environment is used to list references.
7620 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7621 only use it at the end of the document.
7633 \begin_layout Standard
7634 When you first open a
7638 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7654 depending on the document class.
7655 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7656 Each paragraph of the
7660 environment is a bibliography entry.
7665 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7666 Each new paragraph is still in the
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7674 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7675 by using a BibTeX database.
7676 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7677 phy handling, have a look at section
7678 \begin_inset space ~
7682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7684 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7691 \begin_layout Subsection
7695 \begin_inset Index idx
7698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7699 Paragraph ! LyX code
7705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7714 \begin_layout Standard
7719 environment is another LyX extension.
7720 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7725 key as a fixed whitespace;
7729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7741 \begin_inset space ~
7746 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7751 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7752 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7755 arg "newline-insert newline"
7772 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7773 So, when you finish using the
7777 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7778 Also, you can nest the
7782 environment inside of others.
7785 \begin_layout Standard
7786 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7789 \begin_layout Itemize
7793 arg "newline-insert newline"
7796 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7801 \begin_inset space \space{}
7811 arg "newline-insert newline"
7817 \begin_layout Itemize
7821 arg "newline-insert newline"
7831 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7837 \begin_layout Itemize
7838 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7839 You must put at least one
7843 in any line you want blank.
7844 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7847 \begin_layout Itemize
7848 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7852 since that will insert
7857 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7860 arg "self-insert \""
7866 \begin_layout Standard
7870 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7874 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7878 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7882 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7886 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7887 printf("Hello World!
7892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7896 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7900 \begin_layout Standard
7901 This is just the standard
7902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7913 \begin_layout Standard
7918 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7919 rc-files, and so on.
7920 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7921 as if you used a typewriter.
7922 \begin_inset Index idx
7925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7926 Paragraph environments|)
7931 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7934 Program Code Listings
7939 \begin_inset space ~
7947 \begin_layout Section
7948 Nesting Environments
7949 \begin_inset Index idx
7952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7953 Nesting ! Environments
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7973 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7975 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7977 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7979 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7991 \begin_layout Enumerate
7995 \begin_layout Enumerate
8000 \begin_layout Enumerate
8004 \begin_layout Enumerate
8009 \begin_layout Enumerate
8013 \begin_layout Standard
8014 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8015 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8017 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8019 \begin_inset space ~
8023 \begin_inset space ~
8031 \begin_inset space ~
8035 \begin_inset space ~
8040 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8042 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8045 arg "depth-increment"
8051 arg "depth-decrement"
8065 arg "depth-increment"
8071 arg "depth-decrement"
8075 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8076 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8080 \begin_layout Standard
8081 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8082 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8083 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8084 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8087 \begin_layout Standard
8088 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8089 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8091 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8094 \begin_layout Subsection
8095 What You Can and Can't Nest
8098 \begin_layout Standard
8099 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8100 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8103 \begin_layout Standard
8104 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8105 than a simple yes or no.
8106 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8109 \begin_layout Itemize
8110 Completely unnestable
8113 \begin_layout Itemize
8114 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8118 \begin_layout Itemize
8119 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8123 \begin_layout Standard
8124 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8125 environments have them:
8128 \begin_layout Description
8129 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8130 Can't nest into them.
8134 \begin_layout Itemize
8140 \begin_layout Itemize
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8152 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8165 \begin_layout Description
8167 \begin_inset space ~
8170 Nestable You can nest them.
8171 You can nest other things into them.
8175 \begin_layout Itemize
8181 \begin_layout Itemize
8187 \begin_layout Itemize
8193 \begin_layout Itemize
8199 \begin_layout Itemize
8205 \begin_layout Itemize
8211 \begin_layout Itemize
8217 \begin_layout Itemize
8224 \begin_layout Description
8225 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8226 You can't nest anything into them.
8230 \begin_layout Itemize
8236 \begin_layout Itemize
8242 \begin_layout Itemize
8248 \begin_layout Itemize
8254 \begin_layout Itemize
8260 \begin_layout Itemize
8266 \begin_layout Itemize
8272 \begin_layout Itemize
8278 \begin_layout Itemize
8284 \begin_layout Itemize
8290 \begin_layout Itemize
8296 \begin_layout Itemize
8302 \begin_layout Itemize
8308 \begin_layout Itemize
8312 \begin_inset space ~
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8325 \begin_layout Standard
8326 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8334 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8344 \begin_inset space ~
8347 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8348 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8349 nested section headings violate this.
8357 \begin_layout Subsection
8358 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8359 \begin_inset Index idx
8362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8363 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8371 \begin_layout Standard
8372 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8373 affected by nesting anyhow.
8377 \begin_layout Itemize
8381 \begin_layout Itemize
8385 \begin_layout Itemize
8389 \begin_layout Standard
8391 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8399 Figures and tables in
8403 are not affected by this.
8408 Have a look at section
8409 \begin_inset space ~
8413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8415 reference "sec:Floats"
8419 for more information about
8426 \begin_layout Standard
8427 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8428 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8432 \begin_layout Standard
8433 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8441 of its own, it behaves just like a
8442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8449 paragraph environment.
8450 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8454 \begin_layout Standard
8455 Here's an example with a table:
8458 \begin_layout Enumerate
8463 \begin_layout Enumerate
8464 This is (a) and it's nested.
8468 \begin_layout Standard
8469 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8475 \begin_layout Standard
8477 \begin_inset Tabular
8478 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8479 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8480 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8481 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8565 \begin_layout Standard
8566 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8573 \begin_layout Enumerate
8575 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8579 \begin_layout Enumerate
8583 \begin_layout Standard
8584 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8587 \begin_layout Enumerate
8592 \begin_layout Enumerate
8593 This is (a) and it's nested.
8597 \begin_layout Standard
8598 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8604 \begin_layout Standard
8606 \begin_inset Tabular
8607 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8608 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8609 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8610 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8694 \begin_layout Standard
8695 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8701 \begin_layout Enumerate
8708 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8711 \begin_layout Enumerate
8715 \begin_layout Standard
8716 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8721 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8723 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8726 \begin_layout Enumerate
8731 \begin_layout Enumerate
8732 This is (a) and it's nested.
8735 \begin_layout Standard
8736 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8742 \begin_layout Standard
8744 \begin_inset Tabular
8745 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8746 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8747 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8748 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8833 \begin_layout Standard
8834 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8840 \begin_layout Enumerate
8842 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8849 \begin_layout Enumerate
8853 \begin_layout Standard
8854 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8860 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8861 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8865 \begin_layout Subsection
8866 Usage and General Features
8869 \begin_layout Standard
8870 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8879 is the innermost possible depth.
8880 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8883 \begin_layout Enumerate
8884 level #1 – outermost
8888 \begin_layout Enumerate
8893 \begin_layout Enumerate
8898 \begin_layout Enumerate
8903 \begin_layout Itemize
8908 \begin_layout Itemize
8917 \begin_layout Standard
8918 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8919 both of them in the example.
8920 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8930 For example, if we tried to nest another
8935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8942 , we would get errors.
8945 \begin_layout Subsection
8947 \begin_inset Index idx
8950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8959 \begin_layout Standard
8960 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8961 We have several examples of nested environments.
8962 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8966 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8967 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8970 \begin_layout Labeling
8971 \labelwidthstring MMM
8972 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8981 \begin_layout Labeling
8982 \labelwidthstring MMM
8983 #2-a This is level #2.
8984 We created it by using
8987 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8993 arg "depth-increment"
9000 \begin_layout Labeling
9001 \labelwidthstring MMM
9002 #3-a This is level #3.
9003 This time, we just enter
9010 arg "depth-increment"
9014 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9018 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9024 arg "depth-increment"
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9036 environment, nested inside of
9037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9045 So, it's at level #4.
9046 We did this by entering
9049 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9055 arg "depth-increment"
9058 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9063 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9079 \begin_layout Standard
9084 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9087 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9093 \begin_layout Labeling
9094 \labelwidthstring MMM
9095 #4-a This is level #4.
9099 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9102 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9107 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9111 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9116 keep nesting things inside
9117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9128 \begin_layout Labeling
9129 \labelwidthstring MMM
9130 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9135 \begin_layout Labeling
9136 \labelwidthstring MMM
9137 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9138 and this is level #6.
9139 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9143 \begin_layout Labeling
9144 \labelwidthstring MMM
9145 #5-b Back to level #5.
9149 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9155 arg "depth-decrement"
9162 \begin_layout Labeling
9163 \labelwidthstring MMM
9167 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9173 arg "depth-decrement"
9176 , we're back at level #4.
9180 \begin_layout Labeling
9181 \labelwidthstring MMM
9182 #3-b Back to level #3.
9183 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9187 \begin_layout Labeling
9188 \labelwidthstring MMM
9189 #2-b Back to level #2.
9194 \begin_layout Labeling
9195 \labelwidthstring MMM
9196 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9197 After this sentence, we will enter
9201 and change the paragraph environment back to
9208 \begin_layout Standard
9209 We could have also used the
9225 environment in place of the
9230 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9234 Example 2: Inheritance
9237 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9238 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9241 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9250 arg "depth-increment"
9254 \begin_inset Newline newline
9257 which, we will change to the
9265 \begin_layout Enumerate
9270 environment, at level #2.
9273 \begin_layout Enumerate
9274 Notice how the nested
9278 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9282 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9286 \begin_layout Standard
9287 We ended this example by entering
9292 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9296 and reset the nesting depth by using
9299 arg "depth-decrement"
9305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9306 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9315 \begin_inset Argument 1
9318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9319 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9327 \begin_layout Enumerate
9328 This is level #1, in an
9332 paragraph environment.
9333 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9337 \begin_layout Enumerate
9342 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9348 arg "depth-increment"
9352 Now, what happens if we nest an
9356 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9357 label be? An asterisk?
9361 \begin_layout Itemize
9371 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9372 So, its label is a bullet.
9373 (We got here by using
9376 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9382 arg "depth-increment"
9385 , then changing the environment to
9393 \begin_layout Itemize
9394 Here's level #4, produced using
9397 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9403 arg "depth-increment"
9407 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9412 \begin_layout Enumerate
9413 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9415 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9420 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9424 , because we are in the
9432 environment (that is, it is an
9447 \begin_layout Enumerate
9452 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9453 type of numbering does LyX use?
9456 \begin_layout Enumerate
9457 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9460 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9463 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9466 \begin_layout Enumerate
9470 arg "depth-decrement"
9473 to decrease the depth after the next
9476 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9483 \begin_layout Enumerate
9485 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9489 \begin_layout Enumerate
9491 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9492 numeral as the label.Why?
9495 \begin_layout Enumerate
9496 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9505 Notice, however, that LyX
9509 reset the counter for the label.
9513 \begin_layout Enumerate
9517 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9523 arg "depth-decrement"
9526 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9527 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9528 into the twofold-nested
9536 \begin_layout Enumerate
9537 The same thing happens if we do another
9540 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9546 arg "depth-decrement"
9549 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9552 \begin_layout Standard
9553 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9558 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9572 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9578 The same rule applies for the
9582 environment, as well.
9585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9586 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9589 \begin_layout Enumerate
9590 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9591 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9592 the same detail with how we did it.
9601 \begin_layout Standard
9609 arg "depth-increment"
9616 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9617 the example in parentheses someplace.
9618 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9619 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9620 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9624 \begin_layout Enumerate
9629 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9634 Now we will add verse.
9635 \begin_inset Newline newline
9638 It will get much worse.
9639 \begin_inset Newline newline
9649 arg "depth-increment"
9660 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9661 \begin_inset Newline newline
9664 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9665 \begin_inset Newline newline
9671 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9684 \begin_layout Standard
9685 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9691 \begin_layout Standard
9693 \begin_inset Tabular
9694 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9695 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9696 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9697 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9786 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9796 arg "depth-increment"
9802 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9812 arg "depth-decrement"
9819 \begin_layout Enumerate
9824 : level #1) This is another item.
9825 Note that selecting a
9829 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9830 3 times to put the table inside the
9838 \begin_layout Quotation
9839 We're now ending the
9843 list and changing to
9848 We're still at level #1.
9849 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9850 The next set of paragraphs is a
9851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9858 We will nest both the
9865 \begin_inset space ~
9870 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9874 for the letter body.
9878 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9881 to preserve the depth.
9882 Remember that you need to use
9885 arg "newline-insert newline"
9888 to create multiple lines inside the
9895 \begin_inset space ~
9905 \begin_layout Right Address
9907 \begin_inset Newline newline
9910 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9911 \begin_inset Newline newline
9917 \begin_layout Address
9919 \begin_inset space ~
9925 \begin_layout Quotation
9926 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9930 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9931 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9932 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9933 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9934 as soon as possible.
9935 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9938 \begin_layout Quotation
9939 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9940 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9941 with your order, along with payment.
9944 \begin_layout Quotation
9945 We thank you again for your patience.
9948 \begin_layout Address
9950 \begin_inset Newline newline
9957 \begin_layout Quotation
9958 That ends that example!
9961 \begin_layout Standard
9962 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9963 just a few keystrokes.
9964 We could have easily nested an
9985 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
9988 \begin_layout Section
9989 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
9990 \begin_inset Index idx
9993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10002 \begin_layout Standard
10003 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10004 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10005 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10006 be broken at the end of a line.
10007 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10011 \begin_layout Subsection
10013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10015 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10020 \begin_inset Index idx
10023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10032 \begin_layout Standard
10033 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10034 line at that point.
10035 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10038 \begin_layout Quote
10039 Further documentation is given in section
10040 \begin_inset Newline newline
10044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10046 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10054 \begin_layout Standard
10055 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10070 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10079 A protected space is set with
10081 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10082 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10084 \begin_inset space ~
10092 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10098 \begin_layout Subsection
10100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10102 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10107 \begin_inset Index idx
10110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10111 Spacing ! Horizontal
10119 \begin_layout Standard
10120 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10122 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10123 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10127 The length units are listed in Appendix
10128 \begin_inset space ~
10132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10134 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10141 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10145 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10150 \begin_inset Index idx
10153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10154 Spaces ! Inter-word
10162 \begin_layout Standard
10163 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10164 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10165 at the ends of sentences.
10166 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10167 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10168 followed by a period; see section
10169 \begin_inset space ~
10173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10175 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10180 To insert a normal space, select
10182 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10183 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10185 \begin_inset space ~
10193 arg "space-insert normal"
10199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10203 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10208 \begin_inset Index idx
10211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10220 \begin_layout Standard
10222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10229 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10238 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10239 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10240 inside abbreviations:
10243 \begin_layout Quote
10245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10249 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10252 \begin_layout Standard
10253 or between values and units.
10254 Compare for example this:
10255 \begin_inset Newline newline
10259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10263 \begin_inset Newline newline
10266 10 kg (normal space
10269 \begin_layout Standard
10270 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10272 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10273 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10275 \begin_inset space ~
10283 arg "space-insert thin"
10289 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10293 \begin_layout Standard
10294 You can also insert the following space types:
10297 \begin_layout Description
10299 \begin_inset space ~
10303 \begin_inset space ~
10306 space A line with a
10307 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10311 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10315 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10318 negative thin space between the arrows.
10321 \begin_layout Description
10323 \begin_inset space ~
10327 \begin_inset space ~
10330 space A line with a
10331 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10335 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10339 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10342 negative medium space between the arrows.
10345 \begin_layout Description
10347 \begin_inset space ~
10351 \begin_inset space ~
10354 space A line with a
10355 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10359 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10363 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10366 negative thick space between the arrows.
10369 \begin_layout Description
10371 \begin_inset space ~
10375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10379 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10383 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10387 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10391 \begin_inset space ~
10395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10398 em) space between the arrows.
10401 \begin_layout Description
10403 \begin_inset space ~
10407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10411 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10415 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10419 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10423 \begin_inset space ~
10427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10430 em) space between the arrows.
10433 \begin_layout Description
10435 \begin_inset space ~
10439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10443 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10447 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10451 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10455 \begin_inset space ~
10459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10462 em) space between the arrows.
10465 \begin_layout Description
10467 \begin_inset space ~
10471 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10475 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10480 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10487 cm space between the arrows.
10490 \begin_layout Standard
10492 \begin_inset space ~
10496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10498 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10502 lists the different space sizes.
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10506 \begin_inset Float table
10511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10512 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10517 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10521 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10531 \begin_inset Tabular
10532 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10533 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10534 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10535 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10651 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10808 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10810 \begin_inset Index idx
10813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10822 \begin_layout Standard
10823 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10824 in a uniform fashion.
10825 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10826 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10827 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10828 equally between themselves.
10831 \begin_layout Standard
10832 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10835 \begin_layout Quote
10837 This is on the left side
10838 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10841 This is on the right
10844 \begin_layout Quote
10847 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10851 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10857 \begin_layout Quote
10860 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10864 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10868 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10874 \begin_layout Standard
10875 That was an example in the
10881 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10885 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10889 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10892 is one in a standard paragraph.
10893 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10897 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10900 \begin_layout Standard
10901 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10904 \begin_inset space ~
10909 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10912 \begin_layout Standard
10914 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10918 \begin_inset space ~
10924 \begin_layout Standard
10926 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10930 \begin_inset space ~
10936 \begin_layout Standard
10938 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10942 \begin_inset space ~
10948 \begin_layout Standard
10950 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10954 \begin_inset space ~
10960 \begin_layout Standard
10962 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10966 \begin_inset space ~
10972 \begin_layout Standard
10974 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10978 \begin_inset space ~
10984 \begin_layout Standard
10985 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10993 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10997 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10998 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10999 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11003 option in the space dialog.
11011 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11015 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11020 \begin_inset Index idx
11023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11032 \begin_layout Standard
11033 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11034 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11037 \begin_layout Standard
11038 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11041 What is correct English?:
11042 \begin_inset Newline newline
11046 \begin_inset Newline newline
11050 \begin_inset space ~
11053 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11054 \begin_inset Newline newline
11058 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11069 \begin_inset Newline newline
11073 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11084 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11090 \begin_layout Standard
11092 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11097 \begin_inset space ~
11101 \begin_inset space ~
11105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11109 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11111 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11112 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11116 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11122 \begin_inset space ~
11126 \begin_inset space ~
11130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11133 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11142 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11143 That is why it is named
11144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11152 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11153 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11157 \begin_layout Subsection
11159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11161 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11166 \begin_inset Index idx
11169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11178 \begin_layout Standard
11179 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11181 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11182 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11184 \begin_inset space ~
11190 There you find the following sizes:
11193 \begin_layout Standard
11206 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11211 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11213 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11214 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11216 \begin_inset space ~
11222 \begin_inset Index idx
11225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11226 Document ! Settings
11231 for the paragraph separation.
11232 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11243 \begin_layout Standard
11249 \begin_inset Index idx
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11259 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11264 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11265 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11274 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11283 s are described in section
11284 \begin_inset space ~
11288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11290 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11299 If there are several
11303 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11304 You can therefore use
11308 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11311 \begin_layout Standard
11316 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11317 \begin_inset space ~
11321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11323 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11330 \begin_layout Standard
11331 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11341 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11342 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11354 \begin_layout Subsection
11355 Paragraph Alignment
11356 \begin_inset Index idx
11359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11360 Paragraph ! Alignment
11368 \begin_layout Standard
11369 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11374 dialog (toolbar button
11377 arg "layout-paragraph"
11381 There are five possibilities:
11384 \begin_layout Itemize
11392 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11398 \begin_layout Itemize
11406 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11412 \begin_layout Itemize
11420 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11426 \begin_layout Itemize
11434 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11440 \begin_layout Itemize
11448 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11454 \begin_layout Standard
11455 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11456 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11457 the left and right margins.
11458 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11461 \begin_layout Standard
11463 This paragraph is right aligned,
11466 \begin_layout Standard
11468 this one is centered,
11471 \begin_layout Standard
11473 this one is left aligned.
11476 \begin_layout Subsection
11478 \begin_inset Index idx
11481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11482 Page breaks ! Forced
11488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11490 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11498 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11499 can force a page break where you want one.
11500 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11501 Only if you use a lot of
11505 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11508 \begin_layout Standard
11509 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11510 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11514 have to change the page breaking.
11517 \begin_layout Standard
11518 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11520 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11522 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11523 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11525 \begin_inset space ~
11531 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11533 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11534 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11536 \begin_inset space ~
11541 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11543 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11544 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11548 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11549 at the top of a page.
11550 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11551 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11552 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11553 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11557 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11561 to learn more about
11568 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11572 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11577 \begin_inset Index idx
11580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11581 Page breaks ! Clear
11589 \begin_layout Standard
11590 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11591 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11592 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11593 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11594 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11597 \begin_layout Standard
11598 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11600 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11601 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11603 \begin_inset space ~
11609 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11611 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11612 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11614 \begin_inset space ~
11618 \begin_inset space ~
11623 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11624 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11627 \begin_layout Subsection
11629 \begin_inset Index idx
11632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11641 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11648 \begin_layout Standard
11649 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11651 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11653 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11654 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11656 \begin_inset space ~
11660 \begin_inset space ~
11668 arg "newline-insert newline"
11672 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11674 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11675 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11677 \begin_inset space ~
11681 \begin_inset space ~
11689 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11692 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11694 This is useful to avoid
11695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11702 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11705 \begin_layout Standard
11706 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11707 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11708 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11709 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11710 \begin_inset space ~
11714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11716 reference "sec:Quote"
11721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11723 reference "sec:Verse"
11728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11730 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11737 \begin_layout Subsection
11739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11741 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11746 \begin_inset Index idx
11749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11758 \begin_layout Standard
11760 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11771 \begin_layout Standard
11775 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11776 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11778 \begin_inset space ~
11783 you can insert horizontal lines.
11784 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11785 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11786 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11789 \begin_layout Standard
11791 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11802 \begin_layout Section
11803 Characters and Symbols
11806 \begin_layout Standard
11807 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11808 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11809 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11817 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11821 for information on how this is done.
11824 \begin_layout Standard
11825 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11830 dialog via the menu
11832 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11833 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11839 \begin_layout Standard
11840 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11849 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11850 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11858 \begin_layout Section
11859 Fonts and Text Styles
11860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11862 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11869 \begin_layout Subsection
11871 \begin_inset Index idx
11874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11883 \begin_layout Standard
11884 There are two types of fonts:
11887 \begin_layout Description
11889 \begin_inset space ~
11893 \begin_inset Index idx
11896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11902 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11907 characters) in the font.
11908 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11909 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11910 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11911 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11912 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11913 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11914 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11915 \begin_inset Newline newline
11918 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11919 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11920 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11921 sizes than at small ones.
11922 \begin_inset Newline newline
11936 \begin_inset space ~
11944 \begin_layout Description
11946 \begin_inset space ~
11950 \begin_inset Index idx
11953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11959 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11960 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11961 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11962 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11963 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11964 image manipulation program.
11965 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11966 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11967 \begin_inset space ~
11970 pixels high up to 34
11971 \begin_inset space ~
11974 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11975 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11976 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11978 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11979 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11980 \begin_inset Newline newline
11983 Bitmap fonts are named
11986 \begin_inset space ~
11991 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11994 \begin_layout Standard
11995 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11996 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11997 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11998 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11999 use scalable fonts.
12002 \begin_layout Standard
12003 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12006 \begin_layout Standard
12007 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12008 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12009 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12010 font to emphasize text, you use an
12011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12019 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12020 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12024 \begin_layout Subsection
12026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12028 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12035 \begin_layout Standard
12036 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12037 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12038 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12040 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12041 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12042 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12043 to a word processor.
12044 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12045 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12046 across different machines.
12047 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12048 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12050 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
12052 \begin_inset space ~
12056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12058 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12063 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
12064 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
12068 \begin_layout Standard
12069 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12070 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12072 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12073 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12074 that is installed on your system.
12075 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12078 \begin_layout Standard
12079 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12087 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12088 es; so you might have to experiment.
12096 \begin_layout Standard
12097 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12105 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12106 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12114 \begin_layout Subsection
12115 Document Font and Font size
12116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12118 name "sub:Document-Font"
12123 \begin_inset Index idx
12126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12133 \begin_inset Index idx
12136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12145 \begin_layout Standard
12146 You can set the document fonts in the
12148 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12152 \begin_inset Index idx
12155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12156 Document ! Settings
12166 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12167 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12170 \begin_inset space ~
12179 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12180 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
12181 with the roman font.
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12200 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12201 This requires that you use
12207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12246 as the output format, i.
12247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12251 \begin_inset space \space{}
12254 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12255 \begin_inset space ~
12259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12261 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12266 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12267 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12272 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12273 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12274 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12276 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12279 \begin_layout Standard
12280 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12285 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12290 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12291 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12298 \begin_inset space ~
12304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12317 European Computer Modern
12320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12327 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12330 \begin_layout Standard
12339 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12340 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12345 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12348 \begin_inset space ~
12353 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12359 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12360 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12363 \begin_layout Itemize
12367 \begin_inset space ~
12372 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12385 \begin_inset space ~
12390 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12394 as the default font.
12395 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12396 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12399 \begin_inset space ~
12412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12413 One difference is improved kerning.
12421 \begin_layout Itemize
12425 \begin_inset space ~
12429 \begin_inset space ~
12434 fonts in (the rare) case that
12437 \begin_inset space ~
12442 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12457 Virtual means that it
12458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12469 -glyphs from other fonts.
12470 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12492 Loading the LaTeX-package
12497 \begin_inset Index idx
12500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12501 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12506 with the document preamble line
12507 \begin_inset Newline newline
12514 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12515 \begin_inset Newline newline
12520 will fix the guillemet problem.
12525 and that accented characters are not
12529 glyph, but built of
12533 characters, the accent and the letter.
12534 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12540 If you search for example for the French word
12541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12548 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12557 and not for the glyph
12558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12562 \begin_inset space ~
12566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12572 \begin_layout Itemize
12573 If you do not like the look of
12581 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12586 \begin_inset space ~
12592 \begin_inset space ~
12602 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12603 \begin_inset space ~
12606 serif and typewriter fonts,
12610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12611 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12612 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12618 \begin_inset space ~
12627 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12632 \begin_inset space \space{}
12640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12644 \begin_inset space \space{}
12650 \begin_inset space ~
12658 \begin_inset space ~
12668 but you can also select your own.
12669 \begin_inset Newline newline
12672 The differences between roman,
12675 \begin_inset space ~
12684 fonts are explained in section
12685 \begin_inset space ~
12689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12691 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12696 \begin_inset Newline newline
12702 \begin_inset space ~
12707 was originally designed for newspapers.
12708 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12709 into the small newspaper columns.
12713 \begin_inset space ~
12718 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12721 \begin_layout Standard
12722 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12735 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12740 depends on the class you are using.
12741 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12744 \begin_layout Standard
12745 Note that the font size is the
12750 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12751 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12752 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12755 \begin_inset space ~
12761 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12762 \begin_inset space ~
12766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12768 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12775 \begin_layout Standard
12779 \begin_inset space ~
12784 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12786 \begin_inset space ~
12789 serif or typewriter.
12794 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12804 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12807 \begin_layout Standard
12816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12825 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12831 \begin_inset Index idx
12834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12835 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12841 \begin_inset space ~
12845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12847 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12852 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12853 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12860 \begin_layout Standard
12861 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12863 Use Old Style Figures
12867 Use True Small Caps
12870 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12873 Use Old Style Figures
12875 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12877 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12885 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12889 Use True Small Caps
12891 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12892 of scaled capitals.
12893 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12894 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12897 \begin_layout Standard
12902 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12903 a font to display the script characters.
12907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12908 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12913 \begin_inset Index idx
12916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12917 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12922 So this has no effect for the document language
12936 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12940 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12948 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12952 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12953 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12954 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12956 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12959 dialog, see section
12960 \begin_inset space ~
12964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12966 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12978 \begin_layout Subsection
12979 Using Different Character Styles
12980 \begin_inset Index idx
12983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12990 \begin_inset Index idx
12993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13002 \begin_layout Standard
13003 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13004 certain paragraph environments.
13005 LyX supports two character styles,
13014 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
13018 \begin_layout Standard
13023 style, do one of the following:
13026 \begin_layout Itemize
13027 click on the toolbar button
13036 \begin_layout Itemize
13037 use the key binding
13046 \begin_layout Standard
13047 These commands are all toggles.
13052 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13055 \begin_layout Standard
13056 One typically uses the
13060 style for proper names.
13062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13069 is the original author of LyX.
13070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13076 \begin_layout Standard
13077 A more widely used character style is the
13082 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13089 \begin_layout Itemize
13090 clicking on the toolbar button
13099 \begin_layout Itemize
13100 using the keybindings
13109 \begin_layout Standard
13114 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13115 es use a different font.
13118 \begin_layout Standard
13119 We've been using the
13123 style all over the place in this document.
13124 Here's one more example:
13127 \begin_layout Quotation
13130 Do not overuse character styles!
13133 \begin_layout Standard
13134 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13135 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13136 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13137 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13141 \begin_layout Standard
13142 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13150 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13152 \begin_inset space ~
13155 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13161 arg "dialog-show character"
13167 \begin_layout Subsection
13168 Fine-Tuning with the
13173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13175 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13180 \begin_inset Index idx
13183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13192 \begin_layout Standard
13193 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13194 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13195 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13196 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13197 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13198 from ordinary dialog.
13201 \begin_layout Standard
13202 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13203 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13204 \begin_inset Newline newline
13207 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13208 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13211 \begin_layout Standard
13212 To use custom character styles, open the
13214 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13216 \begin_inset space ~
13219 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13222 dialog or press the toolbar button
13225 arg "dialog-show character"
13229 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13230 font property that you can choose.
13231 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13234 \begin_inset space ~
13239 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13244 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13245 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13246 environments all at once.
13249 \begin_layout Standard
13250 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13253 \begin_inset space ~
13265 \begin_layout Labeling
13266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13280 The possible options are:
13284 \begin_layout Labeling
13285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13290 This is the Roman font family.
13291 Normally a serif font.
13292 It's also the default family.
13302 \begin_layout Labeling
13303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13307 \begin_inset space ~
13314 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13326 \begin_layout Labeling
13327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13334 This is the Typewriter font family.
13340 arg "font-typewriter"
13349 \begin_layout Labeling
13350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13355 This corresponds to the print weight.
13360 \begin_layout Labeling
13361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13366 This is the Medium font series.
13367 It's also the default series.
13370 \begin_layout Labeling
13371 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13378 This is the Bold font series.
13391 \begin_layout Labeling
13392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13397 As the name implies.
13402 \begin_layout Labeling
13403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13408 This is the Upright font shape.
13409 It's also the default shape.
13412 \begin_layout Labeling
13413 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13427 s the Italic font shape
13433 \begin_layout Labeling
13434 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13441 This is the Slanted font shape
13443 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13446 \begin_layout Labeling
13447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13451 \begin_inset space ~
13458 This is the Small caps font shape
13465 \begin_layout Labeling
13466 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13471 Alters the text color.
13472 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13476 \begin_inset space ~
13481 , which means that the document default color set in
13483 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13484 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13490 \begin_inset space ~
13495 is used, you can choose between
13528 \begin_inset Index idx
13531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13540 \begin_layout Labeling
13541 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13546 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13547 the language of the document.
13548 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13550 \begin_inset Newline newline
13553 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13554 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13555 When using the spell checking (see section
13556 \begin_inset space ~
13560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13562 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13566 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13569 \begin_layout Labeling
13570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13575 Alters the size of the font.
13576 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13577 proportional to the document font size.
13578 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13579 what you want to do.
13584 \begin_layout Labeling
13585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13606 arg "font-size tiny"
13612 \begin_layout Labeling
13613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13634 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13640 \begin_layout Labeling
13641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13662 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13668 \begin_layout Labeling
13669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13690 arg "font-size small"
13696 \begin_layout Labeling
13697 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13711 It's also the default size.
13715 arg "font-size normal"
13721 \begin_layout Labeling
13722 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13743 arg "font-size large"
13749 \begin_layout Labeling
13750 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13771 arg "font-size larger"
13777 \begin_layout Labeling
13778 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13799 arg "font-size largest"
13805 \begin_layout Labeling
13806 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13827 arg "font-size huge"
13833 \begin_layout Labeling
13834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13855 arg "font-size giant"
13861 \begin_layout Labeling
13862 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13867 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13887 arg "font-size increase"
13893 \begin_layout Labeling
13894 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13899 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13919 arg "font-size decrease"
13926 \begin_layout Standard
13931 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13932 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13933 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13934 — use those instead.
13935 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13938 \begin_layout Labeling
13939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13944 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13949 \begin_layout Labeling
13950 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13957 This is text with emphasize on
13960 This might seem like the same as
13964 , but it is actually a bit different.
13970 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13972 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13983 This is text with Underbar on.
13989 arg "font-underline"
13995 \begin_inset Newline newline
14000 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14001 when you could not change fonts.
14002 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14003 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14007 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14010 \begin_layout Labeling
14011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14015 \begin_inset space ~
14022 This is text with Double underbar on.
14028 arg "font-underunderline"
14032 \begin_inset Newline newline
14035 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14036 about double underbar.
14039 \begin_layout Labeling
14040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14044 \begin_inset space ~
14051 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14057 arg "font-underwave"
14061 \begin_inset Newline newline
14064 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14065 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14068 \begin_layout Labeling
14069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14076 This is text with Strikeout on.
14082 arg "font-strikeout"
14086 \begin_inset Newline newline
14089 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14090 changed in the meantime.
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14101 This is text with Noun on.
14108 , this is a logical attribute.
14109 Normally it's equivalent to
14112 \begin_inset space ~
14121 \begin_layout Standard
14122 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14123 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14125 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14127 \begin_inset space ~
14130 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14136 arg "dialog-show character"
14139 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14140 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14143 arg "textstyle-apply"
14147 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14151 \begin_layout Standard
14152 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14159 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14160 (suppose you just set the shape to
14161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14179 \begin_inset space ~
14191 \begin_layout Standard
14192 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14200 \begin_inset space ~
14212 \begin_layout Itemize
14218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14225 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14243 \begin_inset Newline newline
14247 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14261 \begin_inset Note Note
14264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14265 For more on phantoms see section
14266 \begin_inset space ~
14270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14272 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14282 \begin_inset Newline newline
14288 \begin_layout Itemize
14293 fonts use characters with serifs.
14294 These are the small
14295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14302 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14303 The following example shows the difference:
14304 \begin_inset Newline newline
14308 \begin_inset Newline newline
14313 text without serifs
14316 \begin_inset Newline newline
14319 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14320 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14327 \begin_layout Itemize
14332 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14333 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14334 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14337 \begin_layout Standard
14338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14345 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14346 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14349 \begin_inset space ~
14354 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14355 the property to be removed.
14356 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14357 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14358 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14376 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14377 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14385 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14389 \begin_inset space ~
14394 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14405 If you, for example, set
14406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14424 \begin_inset space ~
14429 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14438 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14441 \begin_layout Standard
14442 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14443 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14446 \begin_layout Section
14447 Printing and Previewing
14450 \begin_layout Subsection
14454 \begin_layout Standard
14455 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14456 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14457 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14458 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14459 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14461 Additional Features
14466 \begin_layout Standard
14467 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14468 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14469 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14470 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14471 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14472 This happens in two stages:
14475 \begin_layout Enumerate
14476 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14477 generating a file with the extension,
14478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14492 \begin_layout Enumerate
14493 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14497 file to produce printable output.
14500 \begin_layout Subsection
14501 Output file formats
14502 \begin_inset Index idx
14505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14514 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14522 Simple text (ASCII)
14523 \begin_inset Index idx
14526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14527 File formats ! ASCII
14535 \begin_layout Standard
14536 This file type has the extension
14537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14549 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14553 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14560 \begin_layout Standard
14561 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14563 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14564 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14566 \begin_inset space ~
14572 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14573 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14574 \begin_inset space ~
14578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14580 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14585 If your document includes such material, use
14587 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14588 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14590 \begin_inset space ~
14594 \begin_inset space ~
14598 \begin_inset space ~
14606 \begin_inset space ~
14610 \begin_inset space ~
14616 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14617 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14620 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14622 \begin_inset Index idx
14625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14626 File formats ! LaTeX
14634 \begin_layout Standard
14635 This file type has the extension
14636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14647 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14649 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14650 it manually with console commands.
14651 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14652 you view or export your document.
14655 \begin_layout Standard
14656 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14658 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14659 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14674 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14675 \begin_inset space ~
14679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14681 reference "sub:Export"
14688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14690 \begin_inset Index idx
14693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14702 \begin_layout Standard
14703 This file type has the extension
14704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14724 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14725 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14726 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14730 \begin_layout Standard
14731 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14732 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14733 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14734 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14735 when you view the DVI.
14736 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14739 \begin_layout Standard
14740 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14742 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14743 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14748 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14749 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14751 \begin_inset space ~
14758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14768 The latter option uses the program
14777 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14778 font access (see section
14779 \begin_inset space ~
14783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14785 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14790 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14791 standard TeX processor.
14794 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14796 \begin_inset Index idx
14799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14800 File formats ! PostScript
14808 \begin_layout Standard
14809 This file type has the extension
14810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14822 PostScript was developed by the company
14826 as a printer language.
14827 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14829 PostScript can be seen as a
14830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14833 programming language
14834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14837 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14842 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14848 \begin_inset Index idx
14851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14852 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14862 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14865 \begin_layout Standard
14866 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14870 Encapsulated PostScript
14871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14874 (EPS, file extension
14875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14887 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14888 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14889 If, for example, you have 50
14890 \begin_inset space ~
14893 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14894 \begin_inset space ~
14897 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14898 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14899 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14900 EPS to avoid this problem.
14903 \begin_layout Standard
14904 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14906 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14907 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14915 \begin_inset Index idx
14918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14925 \begin_inset Index idx
14928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14937 \begin_layout Standard
14938 This file type has the extension
14939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14955 Portable Document Format
14956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14963 was derived from PostScript.
14964 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14973 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
14974 looks exactly the same.
14977 \begin_layout Standard
14978 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14982 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14986 (JPG, file extension
14987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15014 Portable Network Graphics
15015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15018 (PNG, file extension
15019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15031 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15032 background to one of these formats.
15033 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15034 will slow down your workflow.
15035 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15038 \begin_layout Standard
15039 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15041 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15047 \begin_layout Description
15049 \begin_inset space ~
15052 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15056 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15059 \begin_layout Description
15061 \begin_inset space ~
15068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15075 X) This uses the program
15079 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15084 is a new engine, derived from
15088 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15089 access (see section
15090 \begin_inset space ~
15094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15096 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15101 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15102 standard TeX processor.
15105 \begin_layout Description
15107 \begin_inset space ~
15114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15121 X) This uses the program
15125 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15130 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15131 font access (see section
15132 \begin_inset space ~
15136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15138 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15143 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15144 vertically written Japanese.
15147 \begin_layout Description
15149 \begin_inset space ~
15152 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15156 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15160 \begin_layout Description
15162 \begin_inset space ~
15165 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15169 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15170 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15174 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15175 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15178 \begin_layout Standard
15182 \begin_inset space ~
15191 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15192 works without problems.
15193 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15194 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15198 \begin_inset space ~
15205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15217 \begin_inset space ~
15224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15233 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15243 \begin_inset Index idx
15246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15247 FileFormats ! XHTML
15253 \begin_inset Index idx
15256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15265 \begin_layout Standard
15266 This file type has the extension
15267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15279 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15280 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15281 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15282 suitable for the purpose.
15283 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15285 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15286 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15289 between different formats, which are described in section
15291 Math Output in XHTML
15296 \begin_inset space ~
15304 \begin_layout Standard
15305 XHTML output remains
15306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15313 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15316 LyX and the World Wide Web
15320 Additional Features
15322 manual, for more information.
15325 \begin_layout Standard
15326 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15328 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15329 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15335 \begin_layout Subsection
15337 \begin_inset Index idx
15340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15349 \begin_layout Standard
15350 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15351 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15360 or use the toolbar button
15367 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15368 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15375 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15379 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15387 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15392 Further output formats can be selected via
15394 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15395 View (Other Formats)
15397 or the toolbar button
15398 \begin_inset Graphics
15399 filename ../images/view-others.png
15401 groupId toolbarbuttons
15408 \begin_layout Standard
15409 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15410 viewer window using the menu
15412 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15417 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15418 Update (Other Formats)
15423 \begin_layout Standard
15424 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15426 To have a real output, export your document.
15429 \begin_layout Subsection
15430 Printing the File from within LyX
15431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15433 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15440 \begin_layout Standard
15441 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15442 it directly from within LyX.
15443 To print a file, select the menu
15445 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15451 arg "dialog-show print"
15454 ) or click on the toolbar button
15457 arg "dialog-show print"
15461 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15462 This file is then processed by the program
15466 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15471 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15474 \begin_layout Standard
15475 You can set the following print parameters in the
15478 \begin_inset space ~
15486 \begin_layout Labeling
15487 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15492 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15497 Note that this printer name is for the program
15506 has to be configured for this printer name.
15507 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15508 \begin_inset space ~
15512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15514 reference "sub:Printer"
15523 The printer should understand PostScript.
15526 \begin_layout Labeling
15527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15532 The name of a file to print to.
15533 The output will be a PostScript file.
15534 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15538 \begin_layout Standard
15539 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15540 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15541 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15542 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15543 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15544 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15545 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15548 \begin_layout Section
15549 A few Words about Typography
15550 \begin_inset Index idx
15553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15562 \begin_layout Subsection
15563 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15564 \begin_inset Index idx
15567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15574 \begin_inset Index idx
15577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15586 \begin_layout Standard
15588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15599 character comes in four lengths: the
15611 , and the minus sign:
15612 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15618 \begin_layout Standard
15619 \begin_inset Tabular
15620 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15621 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15622 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15623 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15624 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15625 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15654 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15694 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15719 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15721 \begin_inset space ~
15724 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15731 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15756 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15758 \begin_inset space ~
15761 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15782 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15816 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15822 \begin_layout Standard
15823 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15835 character multiple times in a row.
15836 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15837 the final output, but not in LyX.
15839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15869 \begin_layout Standard
15870 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15871 math mode and has a length of its own.
15872 Here are some examples:
15875 \begin_layout Enumerate
15876 line- and page-breaks
15877 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15887 \begin_layout Enumerate
15889 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15899 \begin_layout Enumerate
15900 Oh — there's a dash.
15901 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15911 \begin_layout Enumerate
15912 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15916 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15926 \begin_layout Subsection
15928 \begin_inset Index idx
15931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15940 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15947 \begin_layout Standard
15948 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15949 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15954 \begin_inset Index idx
15957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15958 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15963 following the rules of the document language.
15966 \begin_layout Standard
15967 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
15972 font and with unusual constructs, like
15973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15981 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15983 This is done with the menu
15985 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15986 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15988 \begin_inset space ~
15994 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15995 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15998 \begin_layout Standard
15999 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16000 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16010 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16018 as a hyphenation possibility.
16019 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16020 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16021 as described in section
16022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16025 Prevent Hyphenation
16026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16032 \begin_inset space ~
16040 \begin_layout Subsection
16042 \begin_inset Index idx
16045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16054 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16055 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16058 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16065 \begin_layout Standard
16066 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16067 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16068 LaTeX then adds the
16069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16072 appropriate amount of space.
16073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16076 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16078 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16079 gets after another word.
16082 \begin_layout Standard
16083 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16084 not work in all cases.
16086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16097 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16098 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16101 \begin_layout Standard
16102 Here are some examples of
16106 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16109 \begin_layout Itemize
16114 \begin_layout Itemize
16119 \begin_layout Standard
16120 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16123 \begin_layout Itemize
16125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16129 this is too much space!
16132 \begin_layout Itemize
16137 \begin_layout Standard
16138 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16141 \begin_layout Standard
16142 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16145 \begin_layout Enumerate
16149 \begin_inset space ~
16154 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16155 \begin_inset space ~
16159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16161 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16166 \begin_inset Index idx
16169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16170 Spaces ! inter-word
16178 \begin_layout Enumerate
16182 \begin_inset space ~
16187 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16188 \begin_inset space ~
16192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16194 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16199 \begin_inset Index idx
16202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16211 \begin_layout Enumerate
16215 \begin_inset space ~
16219 \begin_inset space ~
16223 \begin_inset space ~
16230 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16232 \begin_inset space ~
16237 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16238 This function is also bound to
16241 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16247 \begin_layout Standard
16248 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16251 \begin_layout Itemize
16253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16257 \begin_inset space \space{}
16260 this is too much space!
16263 \begin_layout Itemize
16264 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16268 \begin_layout Standard
16269 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16270 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16271 will take care of this.
16274 \begin_layout Standard
16275 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16279 \begin_inset space ~
16284 feature described in the section
16290 Additional Features
16295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16297 \begin_inset Index idx
16300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16301 Typography ! Quotes
16307 \begin_inset Index idx
16310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16341 \begin_layout Standard
16342 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16343 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16344 and use a closing quote at the end.
16346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16354 The keyboard character,
16358 , generates this automatically.
16361 \begin_layout Standard
16362 You can specify what character the
16366 key produces using the submenu
16372 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16376 \begin_inset Index idx
16379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16380 Document ! Settings
16390 There are six choices:
16393 \begin_layout Labeling
16394 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16417 \begin_layout Labeling
16418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16421 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16425 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16431 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16435 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16441 \begin_layout Labeling
16442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16445 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16449 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16455 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16459 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16465 \begin_layout Labeling
16466 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16469 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16473 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16479 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16483 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16489 \begin_layout Labeling
16490 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16493 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16497 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16503 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16507 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16513 \begin_layout Labeling
16514 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16517 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16521 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16527 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16531 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16537 \begin_layout Standard
16538 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16541 arg "quote-insert single"
16547 \begin_layout Subsection
16549 \begin_inset Index idx
16552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16553 Typography ! Ligatures
16559 \begin_inset Index idx
16562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16593 name "sub:Ligatures"
16600 \begin_layout Standard
16601 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16602 print them as single characters.
16603 These groups are known as
16608 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16610 Here are the standard ligatures:
16613 \begin_layout Itemize
16617 \begin_layout Itemize
16621 \begin_layout Itemize
16625 \begin_layout Itemize
16629 \begin_layout Itemize
16633 \begin_layout Standard
16634 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16637 \begin_layout Standard
16638 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16639 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16647 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16663 To break a ligature, use
16665 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16666 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16668 \begin_inset space ~
16675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16686 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16703 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16711 \begin_layout Subsection
16713 \begin_inset Index idx
16716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16725 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16732 \begin_layout Standard
16733 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16734 characters in different sizes and positions.
16735 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16736 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16756 \begin_inset Note Note
16759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16760 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
16761 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16766 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16767 following proper names:
16770 \begin_layout Description
16771 LyX The name of the game, write
16772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16793 \begin_layout Description
16794 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16816 \begin_layout Description
16817 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16839 \begin_layout Description
16840 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16862 \begin_layout Standard
16863 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16868 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16876 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16877 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16878 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16881 : The actual version is
16882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16889 , the previous one was
16890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16900 \begin_layout Standard
16901 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16902 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16903 In LyX this will look like
16904 \begin_inset Graphics
16905 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16911 \begin_inset Newline newline
16914 For more about TeX Code, see section
16915 \begin_inset space ~
16919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16921 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16928 \begin_layout Subsection
16930 \begin_inset Index idx
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16942 \begin_layout Standard
16943 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16944 space between two words.
16945 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16955 for units use the menu
16957 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16958 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16960 \begin_inset space ~
16968 arg "space-insert thin"
16974 \begin_layout Standard
16975 Here is an example to show the differences:
16978 \begin_layout Standard
16979 \begin_inset Tabular
16980 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16981 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16982 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16983 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16990 \begin_inset space ~
16994 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17006 space between number and unit
17013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17022 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17034 half space between number and unit
17047 \begin_layout Subsection
17049 \begin_inset Index idx
17052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17053 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17061 \begin_layout Standard
17062 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17064 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17065 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17066 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17067 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17068 These bits of text became known as
17079 \begin_layout Standard
17080 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17081 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17082 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17083 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17084 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17085 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17086 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17087 \begin_inset Newline newline
17095 \begin_inset Newline newline
17103 \begin_inset Newline newline
17106 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17107 Some LaTeX books (such as
17108 \begin_inset space ~
17112 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17114 key "latexcompanion"
17119 \begin_inset space ~
17123 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17129 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17133 \begin_layout Chapter
17134 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17137 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17144 \begin_layout Standard
17145 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17148 \begin_inset space ~
17154 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17157 \begin_layout Section
17159 \begin_inset Index idx
17162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17178 \begin_layout Standard
17179 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17182 \begin_layout Description
17184 \begin_inset space ~
17187 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17188 \begin_inset Newline newline
17192 \begin_inset Note Note
17195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17196 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17204 \begin_layout Description
17205 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17206 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17208 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17209 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17222 \begin_inset space ~
17228 \begin_inset Newline newline
17232 \begin_inset Note Comment
17235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17236 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17244 \begin_layout Description
17246 \begin_inset space ~
17249 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17250 set in the document settings under
17252 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17254 \begin_inset space ~
17260 \begin_inset Newline newline
17264 \begin_inset Newline newline
17268 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17277 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17278 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17283 of a comment that appears in the output.
17289 \begin_inset Newline newline
17293 \begin_inset Newline newline
17296 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17299 \begin_layout Standard
17300 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17308 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17312 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17315 \begin_layout Section
17317 \begin_inset Index idx
17320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17329 name "sec:Footnotes"
17336 \begin_layout Standard
17337 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17340 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17343 or the toolbar button
17346 arg "footnote-insert"
17358 \begin_inset Graphics
17359 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17368 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17397 label, the box will
17401 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17402 Clicking on the box label again will close
17415 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17416 and click on the footnote
17431 \begin_layout Standard
17432 Here is an example footnote:
17440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17441 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17449 \begin_layout Standard
17450 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17451 position where the footnote box is placed.
17452 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17453 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17454 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17455 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17460 ey are described in the
17463 \begin_inset space ~
17471 \begin_layout Section
17473 \begin_inset Index idx
17476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17485 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17492 \begin_layout Standard
17493 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17494 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17496 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17498 \begin_inset space ~
17503 or the toolbar button
17506 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17532 appearing within your text.
17533 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17542 \begin_layout Standard
17543 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17547 \begin_inset Marginal
17550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17552 This is a marginal note.
17560 \begin_layout Standard
17561 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17562 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17563 pages, right on odd pages.
17566 \begin_layout Standard
17567 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17570 \begin_inset space ~
17578 \begin_inset space ~
17586 \begin_layout Section
17587 Graphics and Images
17588 \begin_inset Index idx
17591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17598 \begin_inset Index idx
17601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17610 name "sec:Graphics"
17617 \begin_layout Standard
17618 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17619 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17622 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17627 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17631 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17634 \begin_layout Standard
17635 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17640 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17641 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17643 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17644 \begin_inset space ~
17648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17650 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17657 \begin_layout Standard
17662 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17663 of the image in the output.
17664 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17668 \begin_inset space ~
17672 \begin_inset space ~
17681 \begin_inset space ~
17685 \begin_inset space ~
17689 \begin_inset space ~
17694 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17695 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17703 \begin_layout Standard
17710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17718 \begin_inset space ~
17722 \begin_inset space ~
17729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17738 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17739 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17743 \begin_inset space ~
17748 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17749 with the image size is printed.
17753 \begin_inset space ~
17757 \begin_inset space ~
17761 \begin_inset space ~
17766 is explained in the
17769 \begin_inset space ~
17781 \begin_layout Standard
17782 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17783 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17785 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17788 \begin_layout Standard
17790 \begin_inset Graphics
17791 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17799 \begin_layout Standard
17800 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17801 the image into a float, see section
17802 \begin_inset space ~
17806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17808 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17815 \begin_layout Subsection
17817 \begin_inset Index idx
17820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17829 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17836 \begin_layout Standard
17837 You can insert images in any known file format.
17838 But as we explained in section
17839 \begin_inset space ~
17843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17845 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17849 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17850 LyX therefore uses the program
17854 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17855 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17856 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17857 \begin_inset space ~
17861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17863 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17870 \begin_layout Standard
17871 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17874 \begin_layout Description
17876 \begin_inset space ~
17879 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17880 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17881 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17885 Graphics Interchange Format
17886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17889 (GIF, file extension
17890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17902 \begin_inset Index idx
17905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17937 Portable Network Graphics
17938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17941 (PNG, file extension
17942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17954 \begin_inset Index idx
17957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17989 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17993 (JPG, file extension
17994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18018 \begin_inset Index idx
18021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18052 \begin_layout Description
18054 \begin_inset space ~
18057 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18059 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18060 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18061 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18062 \begin_inset Newline newline
18065 Scalable image formats can be
18066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18069 Scalable Vector Graphics
18070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18073 (SVG, file extension
18074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18086 \begin_inset Index idx
18089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18121 Encapsulated PostScript
18122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18125 (EPS, file extension
18126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18138 \begin_inset Index idx
18141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18173 Portable Document Format
18174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18177 (PDF, file extension
18178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18190 \begin_inset Index idx
18193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18208 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18209 result will not be scalable.
18210 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18216 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18224 \begin_layout Standard
18225 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18232 \begin_layout Subsection
18233 Grouping of Image Settings
18234 \begin_inset Index idx
18237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18238 Images ! Settings grouping
18246 \begin_layout Standard
18247 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18249 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18250 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18252 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18253 need to manually change each of them.
18257 \begin_layout Standard
18258 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18261 \begin_inset space ~
18265 \begin_inset space ~
18280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18288 \begin_inset space ~
18292 \begin_inset space ~
18299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18309 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18310 and checking the name of the desired group.
18313 \begin_layout Section
18315 \begin_inset Index idx
18318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18334 \begin_layout Standard
18335 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18338 arg "tabular-insert"
18343 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18347 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18348 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18349 from the rest of the table.
18350 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18351 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18353 Here is an example table:
18356 \begin_layout Standard
18358 \begin_inset Tabular
18359 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18360 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18361 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18362 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18363 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18364 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18564 \begin_layout Subsection
18568 \begin_layout Standard
18569 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18572 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18576 This brings up the table dialog.
18577 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18578 cursor is placed currently.
18579 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18580 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18581 done on all of your selection.
18584 \begin_layout Standard
18585 In addition to the table dialog, the
18588 \begin_inset space ~
18593 helps you in setting table properties.
18594 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18597 \begin_layout Standard
18601 \begin_inset space ~
18606 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18607 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18608 current cell respectively.
18609 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18611 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18612 of text, see section
18613 \begin_inset space ~
18617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18619 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18626 \begin_layout Standard
18627 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18628 using the check box
18637 This will merge the cells to
18641 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18642 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18643 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18644 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18645 in the last row without the upper border:
18648 \begin_layout Standard
18650 \begin_inset Tabular
18651 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18652 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18653 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18654 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18655 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18656 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18667 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18676 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18752 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18787 \begin_layout Standard
18788 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18789 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18790 explained in the chapter
18797 \begin_inset space ~
18803 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18807 degrees counterclockwise.
18808 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18811 \begin_layout Standard
18812 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18820 Most DVI-viewers are
18824 able to display rotations.
18832 \begin_layout Standard
18837 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18842 adds lines for all cell borders.
18845 \begin_layout Subsection
18847 \begin_inset Index idx
18850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18851 Tables ! Longtables
18857 \begin_inset Index idx
18860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18869 \begin_layout Standard
18870 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18873 \begin_inset space ~
18877 \begin_inset space ~
18886 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18887 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18890 \begin_layout Description
18895 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18896 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18897 except for the first page, if
18900 \begin_inset space ~
18908 \begin_layout Description
18912 \begin_inset space ~
18917 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18918 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18921 \begin_layout Description
18926 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18927 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18928 except for the last page, if
18931 \begin_inset space ~
18939 \begin_layout Description
18943 \begin_inset space ~
18948 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18949 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18952 \begin_layout Description
18953 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18954 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18956 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18960 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18963 \begin_inset space ~
18971 \begin_layout Standard
18972 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18973 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18974 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18980 In this context, first means first in this order:
18983 \begin_inset space ~
18995 \begin_inset space ~
19000 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19003 \begin_layout Standard
19005 \begin_inset Tabular
19006 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19007 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19008 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19009 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19010 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19011 <row endfirsthead="true">
19012 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19018 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19023 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19032 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19042 <row endfirsthead="true">
19043 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19054 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19063 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19075 <row endhead="true">
19076 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19087 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19096 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19106 <row endhead="true">
19107 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19118 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19127 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19139 <row endfoot="true">
19140 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19151 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19160 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19191 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20141 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20161 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20192 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20223 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20254 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20378 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20409 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20440 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20471 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20502 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20564 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20595 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20657 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20750 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20936 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21121 <row endlastfoot="true">
21122 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21133 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 \begin_layout Subsection
21161 \begin_inset Index idx
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21173 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21180 \begin_layout Standard
21181 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21182 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21183 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21184 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21188 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21191 \begin_layout Standard
21192 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21193 for the column in the table dialog.
21194 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21195 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21199 \begin_layout Standard
21201 \begin_inset Tabular
21202 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21203 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21205 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21226 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21295 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21351 This is longer now.
21356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21407 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21408 This is longer now.
21413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21439 \begin_layout Standard
21440 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21441 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21446 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21447 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21453 Selection with the mouse or with
21457 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21458 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21459 the selection from outside the table.
21462 \begin_layout Section
21464 \begin_inset Index idx
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21483 \begin_layout Subsection
21487 \begin_layout Standard
21488 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21489 have a fixed location.
21491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21498 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21506 \begin_inset space ~
21511 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21512 too many notes on the current page.
21515 \begin_layout Standard
21516 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21517 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21518 and pages without text.
21519 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21520 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21521 Floats are therefore numbered.
21522 Referencing is described in section
21523 \begin_inset space ~
21527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21529 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21536 \begin_layout Standard
21537 To insert a float, use the menu
21539 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21543 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21544 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21546 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21547 \begin_inset Index idx
21550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21556 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21557 paragraph within the float.
21558 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21559 by left-clicking on the box label.
21560 A closed float box looks like this:
21561 \begin_inset Graphics
21562 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21567 – a gray button with a red label.
21570 \begin_layout Standard
21571 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21572 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21575 \begin_layout Subsection
21579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21583 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21588 \begin_inset Index idx
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 Floats ! Figure floats
21600 \begin_layout Standard
21602 \begin_inset space ~
21606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21608 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21612 was created using the menu
21614 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21615 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21621 arg "float-insert figure"
21625 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21628 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21634 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21638 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21639 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21641 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21643 \begin_inset space ~
21651 arg "layout-paragraph"
21657 \begin_layout Standard
21658 \begin_inset Float figure
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21665 \begin_inset Graphics
21666 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21676 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21681 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21685 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21698 \begin_layout Standard
21699 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21700 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21702 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21711 ) and refer to it using the menu
21713 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21719 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21723 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21724 vague references like
21725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21732 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21742 For more about cross-references, see section
21743 \begin_inset space ~
21747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21749 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21756 \begin_layout Standard
21757 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21758 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21759 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21760 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21761 as described in section
21762 \begin_inset space ~
21766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21768 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21774 \begin_inset space ~
21778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21780 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21784 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21785 You can also set the images one below the other.
21787 \begin_inset space ~
21791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21793 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21800 reference "fig:Platypus"
21804 are the subfigures.
21807 \begin_layout Standard
21808 \begin_inset Float figure
21813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21814 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21818 \begin_inset Float figure
21823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21824 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21829 name "fig:Undefinable"
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 \begin_inset Graphics
21843 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21854 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21858 \begin_inset Float figure
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21864 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21869 name "fig:Platypus"
21881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21882 \begin_inset Graphics
21883 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21895 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21902 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21907 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21911 Two distorted images.
21924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21926 \begin_inset Index idx
21929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 Floats ! Table floats
21938 \begin_layout Standard
21939 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21941 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21942 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21945 or the toolbar button
21948 arg "float-insert table"
21952 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
21953 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
21954 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
21956 \begin_inset space ~
21960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21962 reference "tab:Table-float"
21969 \begin_layout Standard
21970 \begin_inset Float table
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21976 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21979 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21981 name "tab:Table-float"
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21995 \begin_inset Tabular
21996 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21997 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21998 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21999 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22000 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22151 \end{array}\right]$
22159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22172 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22193 \begin_layout Subsection
22195 \begin_inset Index idx
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22207 \begin_layout Standard
22208 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22209 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22210 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22212 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22220 \begin_inset space ~
22228 \begin_layout Section
22230 \begin_inset Index idx
22233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22242 \begin_layout Standard
22243 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22245 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22246 \begin_inset space \space{}
22253 \begin_layout Standard
22254 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22256 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22260 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22261 and its alignment within the page.
22264 \begin_layout Standard
22266 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22276 height_special "totalheight"
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 This is a minipage.
22283 The text is set in an italic style.
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22289 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22290 another formatting.
22298 \begin_layout Standard
22299 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22302 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22306 as described in section
22307 \begin_inset space ~
22311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22313 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22318 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22324 \begin_layout Standard
22325 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22335 height_special "totalheight"
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22339 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22340 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22346 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22350 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22360 height_special "totalheight"
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22365 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22373 \begin_layout Standard
22374 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22380 \begin_layout Standard
22381 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22383 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22390 \begin_inset space ~
22398 \begin_layout Chapter
22399 Mathematical Formulas
22400 \begin_inset Index idx
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22410 \begin_inset Index idx
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22444 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22451 \begin_layout Standard
22452 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22457 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22460 \begin_layout Section
22462 \begin_inset Index idx
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22474 \begin_layout Standard
22475 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22488 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22490 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22491 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22492 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22494 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22500 \begin_layout Standard
22501 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22505 \begin_inset space ~
22510 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22513 \begin_layout Standard
22514 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22515 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22518 \begin_layout Standard
22519 This is a line with an inline formula
22520 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22526 \begin_layout Standard
22527 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22528 paragraph, like this one:
22529 \begin_inset Formula
22536 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22539 \begin_layout Standard
22540 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22541 For example, typing
22542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22555 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22556 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22560 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22563 \begin_inset space ~
22571 \begin_layout Subsection
22572 Navigating in Formulas
22573 \begin_inset Index idx
22576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22585 \begin_layout Standard
22586 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22587 achieved with the arrow keys.
22588 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22589 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22594 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22595 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22599 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22603 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22606 \end{array}\right]$
22614 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22619 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22620 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22623 \begin_layout Standard
22628 , printed in this document as
22629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22633 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22640 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22641 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22642 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22647 For example, if you want
22648 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22656 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22666 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22670 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22675 , since in the latter case only the
22678 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22683 will be under the square root sign:
22684 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22690 \begin_layout Standard
22691 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22693 \begin_inset Formula
22695 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22704 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22705 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22708 \begin_layout Subsection
22712 \begin_layout Standard
22713 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22714 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22718 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22719 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22720 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22721 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22722 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22725 \begin_layout Subsection
22726 Exponents and Subscripts
22727 \begin_inset Index idx
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22737 \begin_inset Index idx
22740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22749 \begin_layout Standard
22750 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22753 arg "math-superscript"
22759 arg "math-subscript"
22762 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22764 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22767 , type in a formula
22770 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22780 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22786 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22790 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22796 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22802 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22811 , you have to use an extra
22815 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22816 For example, if you want
22817 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22823 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22829 Subscripts are similar: To get
22830 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22836 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22844 \begin_layout Subsection
22846 \begin_inset Index idx
22849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22858 \begin_layout Standard
22859 Create a fraction either with the command
22865 or by using the icon
22868 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22874 \begin_inset space ~
22880 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22881 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22882 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22887 To move back up, press
22892 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22893 \begin_inset Formula
22895 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22898 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22906 \begin_layout Subsection
22908 \begin_inset Index idx
22911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22920 \begin_layout Standard
22921 Roots can be created using the
22924 \begin_inset space ~
22932 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22938 arg "math-insert \\root"
22960 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22966 always produces a square root.
22969 \begin_layout Subsection
22970 Operators with Limits
22971 \begin_inset Index idx
22974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22981 \begin_inset Index idx
22984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22993 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23000 \begin_layout Standard
23002 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23006 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23009 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23010 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23011 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23012 The sum operator will automatically place its
23013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23020 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23022 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23026 \begin_inset Formula
23028 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23033 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23037 \begin_layout Standard
23038 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23040 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23041 behind the operator and using the menu
23043 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23044 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23046 \begin_inset space ~
23050 \begin_inset space ~
23064 \begin_layout Standard
23065 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23074 \begin_inset Index idx
23077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23084 \begin_inset Formula
23086 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23091 which will place the
23092 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23104 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23105 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23111 \begin_layout Standard
23112 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23119 Have a look at section
23120 \begin_inset space ~
23124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23126 reference "sub:Functions"
23130 for an explanation of function macros.
23133 \begin_layout Subsection
23135 \begin_inset Index idx
23138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23147 \begin_layout Standard
23148 Most math symbols can be found in the
23151 \begin_inset space ~
23156 under one of several categories; including
23173 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23177 \begin_layout Standard
23178 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23179 you don't have to use the
23182 \begin_inset space ~
23187 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23188 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23191 \begin_layout Subsection
23193 \begin_inset Index idx
23196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23205 \begin_layout Standard
23206 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23211 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23217 \begin_inset space ~
23225 arg "math-insert \\space"
23229 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23230 For example, the sequence
23235 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23239 \begin_inset Graphics
23240 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23245 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23246 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23247 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23248 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23250 Here are two examples:
23253 \begin_layout Standard
23263 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23269 \begin_layout Standard
23279 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23285 \begin_layout Subsection
23287 \begin_inset Index idx
23290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23299 name "sub:Functions"
23306 \begin_layout Standard
23310 \begin_inset space ~
23315 contains under the button
23318 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23321 a number of function macros, such as
23322 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23326 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23334 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23341 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23342 avoid confusions, because
23343 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23347 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23353 \begin_layout Standard
23354 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23356 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23360 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23366 \begin_layout Standard
23367 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23368 are placed, as described in section
23369 \begin_inset space ~
23373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23375 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23382 \begin_layout Subsection
23384 \begin_inset Index idx
23387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 \begin_layout Standard
23397 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23399 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23400 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23401 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23404 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23405 Our example is entered by typing
23410 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23417 \begin_inset space ~
23421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23423 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23427 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23430 \begin_layout Standard
23431 \begin_inset Float table
23436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23437 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23442 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23446 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23456 \begin_inset Tabular
23457 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23458 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23459 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23460 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23461 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23545 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23599 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23653 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23707 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23761 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23869 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24022 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24043 \begin_layout Standard
24044 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24047 \begin_inset space ~
24055 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24058 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24062 \begin_layout Section
24063 Brackets and Delimiters
24064 \begin_inset Index idx
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24074 \begin_inset Index idx
24077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24086 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24093 \begin_layout Standard
24094 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24095 For some purposes, using just the keys
24100 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24101 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24102 toolbar delimiter icon
24105 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24109 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24110 \begin_inset Formula
24112 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24120 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24121 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24125 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24128 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24134 \begin_inset Formula
24136 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24144 \begin_layout Standard
24145 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24146 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24150 \begin_layout Standard
24151 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24152 left side and right side.
24153 If you use the option
24156 \begin_inset space ~
24161 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24162 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24163 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24168 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24171 \begin_layout Standard
24172 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24173 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24174 is to go inside the brackets.
24175 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24180 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24181 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24182 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24186 arg "math-delim ( )"
24192 \begin_layout Section
24193 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24194 \begin_inset Index idx
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 \begin_inset Index idx
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 \begin_inset Index idx
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24226 \begin_layout Standard
24227 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24230 \begin_inset space ~
24238 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24242 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24243 Here is an example:
24244 \begin_inset Formula
24246 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24255 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24256 \begin_inset space ~
24260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24262 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24267 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24268 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24269 This alignment is set in the box
24274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24322 for every column as default.
24323 For example, the sequence
24324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24335 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24336 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24337 corresponds to the relevant column.
24338 The result will look like this:
24339 \begin_inset Formula
24342 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24343 column & has & has\, right\\
24344 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24353 \begin_layout Standard
24354 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24357 arg "newline-insert newline"
24360 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24361 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24363 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24366 or the math toolbar.
24369 \begin_layout Standard
24370 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24371 It can be created with the menu
24373 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24374 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24376 \begin_inset space ~
24388 Here is an example:
24389 \begin_inset Formula
24403 \begin_layout Standard
24404 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24407 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24410 arg "newline-insert newline"
24414 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24419 arg "newline-insert newline"
24422 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24430 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24431 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24432 A new row is created by every further entry of
24435 arg "newline-insert newline"
24439 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24440 Here is an example:
24441 \begin_inset Formula
24443 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24444 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24449 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24450 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24451 \begin_inset Formula
24453 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24461 \begin_layout Standard
24462 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24469 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24470 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24473 reference "eq:asquared"
24478 The other types are described in section
24479 \begin_inset space ~
24483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24485 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24492 \begin_layout Section
24493 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24494 \begin_inset Index idx
24497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24498 Math ! Formula numbering
24504 \begin_inset Index idx
24507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24508 Math ! Referencing formulas
24514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24516 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24523 \begin_layout Standard
24524 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24526 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24527 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24529 \begin_inset space ~
24533 \begin_inset space ~
24541 arg "math-number-toggle"
24545 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24546 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24547 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24548 the document class.
24549 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24550 separated by a dot:
24551 \begin_inset Formula
24561 arg "math-number-toggle"
24564 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24565 You can only number displayed formulas.
24568 \begin_layout Standard
24569 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24571 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24572 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24574 \begin_inset space ~
24578 \begin_inset space ~
24586 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24589 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24590 \begin_inset Formula
24593 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24599 To number all lines use the shortcut
24602 arg "math-number-toggle"
24608 \begin_layout Standard
24609 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24612 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24613 A label is inserted with the menu
24615 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24624 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24625 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24626 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24638 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24639 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24640 We inserted in the following example the label
24641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24648 in the second line:
24649 \begin_inset Formula
24651 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24652 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24657 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24658 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24659 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24661 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24663 \begin_inset space ~
24671 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24675 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24676 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24677 as the formula number:
24680 \begin_layout Standard
24681 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24684 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24691 \begin_layout Standard
24692 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24693 \begin_inset space ~
24697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24699 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24704 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24712 \begin_layout Section
24713 User defined math macros
24714 \begin_inset Index idx
24717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24726 \begin_layout Standard
24727 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24728 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24729 Math macros are explained in section
24732 \begin_inset space ~
24744 \begin_layout Section
24748 \begin_layout Subsection
24750 \begin_inset Index idx
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 \begin_layout Standard
24763 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24764 To set a font in a formula, use the
24767 \begin_inset space ~
24775 arg "math-insert \\font"
24778 , or enter its command, listed in table
24779 \begin_inset space ~
24783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24785 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24792 \begin_layout Standard
24793 \begin_inset Float table
24798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24799 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24804 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24808 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24818 \begin_inset Tabular
24819 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24820 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24821 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24822 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24854 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24881 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24908 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24941 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24968 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24995 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25029 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25056 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25090 \begin_layout Standard
25091 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25099 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25115 \begin_layout Standard
25116 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25117 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25122 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25123 space when you need a space in the box.
25124 Here is an example where
25125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25136 denotes the set of numbers:
25137 \begin_inset Formula
25139 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25147 \begin_layout Standard
25148 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25149 You can, for example, put a character in
25158 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25162 \begin_inset Newline newline
25165 So it is better not to use this feature.
25168 \begin_layout Standard
25169 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25170 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25174 \begin_inset Newline newline
25177 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25183 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25184 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25190 \begin_layout Standard
25197 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25200 \begin_layout Standard
25201 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25203 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25204 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25206 \begin_inset space ~
25214 \begin_layout Subsection
25216 \begin_inset Index idx
25219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25228 \begin_layout Standard
25229 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25231 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25235 \begin_inset space ~
25239 \begin_inset space ~
25247 \begin_inset space ~
25255 arg "math-insert \\font"
25259 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25260 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25261 Here is an example:
25262 \begin_inset Formula
25265 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25266 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25275 \begin_layout Subsection
25277 \begin_inset Index idx
25280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25289 \begin_layout Standard
25290 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25291 automatically chosen in most situations.
25309 For most characters,
25317 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25318 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25323 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25324 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25326 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25329 arg "math-insert \\style"
25333 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25334 For example, you can set
25335 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25338 , which is normally in
25347 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25351 The four styles are used in the following example:
25354 \begin_layout Standard
25355 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25359 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25363 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25367 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25373 \begin_layout Standard
25374 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25375 is set in a particular size with the menu
25377 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25379 \begin_inset space ~
25384 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25385 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25386 will be adjusted to correspond.
25387 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25398 \begin_layout Standard
25402 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25408 \begin_layout Section
25410 \begin_inset Index idx
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25420 \begin_inset Index idx
25423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25432 \begin_layout Standard
25433 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25434 (AMS) that are in common use.
25437 \begin_layout Subsection
25438 Enabling AMS-Support
25441 \begin_layout Standard
25442 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25443 the document by selecting the checkbox
25446 \begin_inset space ~
25450 \begin_inset space ~
25454 \begin_inset space ~
25461 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25465 \begin_inset Index idx
25468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 Document ! Settings
25477 \begin_inset space ~
25483 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25484 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25487 \begin_layout Subsection
25489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25491 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25496 \begin_inset Index idx
25499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25500 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25508 \begin_layout Standard
25509 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25510 LyX allows you to choose between
25531 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25532 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25538 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25541 \begin_layout Chapter
25545 \begin_layout Section
25547 \begin_inset Index idx
25550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25559 name "sec:Cross-References"
25566 \begin_layout Standard
25567 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25568 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25570 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25571 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25572 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25575 \begin_layout Enumerate
25579 \begin_layout Enumerate
25580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25582 name "enu:Second-item"
25589 \begin_layout Enumerate
25593 \begin_layout Standard
25594 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25596 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25599 or by pressing the toolbar button
25606 A gray label box like this:
25607 \begin_inset Graphics
25608 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25613 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25614 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25649 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25650 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25666 \begin_layout Standard
25667 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25669 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25672 or the toolbar button
25675 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25679 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25680 \begin_inset Graphics
25681 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25686 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25688 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25701 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25705 \begin_layout Standard
25706 As an alternative to
25708 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25711 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25716 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25717 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25719 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25731 \begin_layout Standard
25732 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25733 \begin_inset space ~
25737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25739 reference "enu:Second-item"
25746 \begin_layout Standard
25747 It is recommended to use a protected space
25751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25752 described in section
25753 \begin_inset space ~
25757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25759 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25768 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25769 line breaks between them.
25772 \begin_layout Standard
25773 There are six formats of cross-references:
25776 \begin_layout Description
25777 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25780 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25787 \begin_layout Description
25788 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25789 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25801 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25808 \begin_layout Description
25809 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25810 \begin_inset space ~
25814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25815 LatexCommand pageref
25816 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25823 \begin_layout Description
25825 \begin_inset space ~
25829 \begin_inset space ~
25832 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25834 LatexCommand vpageref
25835 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25840 \begin_inset Newline newline
25843 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25844 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25845 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25846 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25847 it prints “on the next page”.
25848 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25851 \begin_layout Description
25853 \begin_inset space ~
25857 \begin_inset space ~
25861 \begin_inset space ~
25864 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25867 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25872 \begin_inset Newline newline
25875 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25881 ; otherwise it behaves like
25885 \begin_inset space ~
25889 \begin_inset space ~
25898 \begin_layout Description
25900 \begin_inset space ~
25903 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25904 \begin_inset Newline newline
25908 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25916 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25925 \begin_inset Index idx
25928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25929 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25935 \begin_inset Index idx
25938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25939 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25950 \begin_inset Newline newline
25953 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25956 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25960 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25961 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25969 is the default and preferred because
25973 supports only English documents.
25974 The format is specified by using the command
25986 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25987 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26000 ) can be done with this command
26001 \begin_inset Newline newline
26008 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26013 \begin_inset Newline newline
26016 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26018 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26020 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26027 \begin_layout Description
26029 \begin_inset space ~
26032 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26034 LatexCommand nameref
26035 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26042 \begin_layout Standard
26043 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26044 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26045 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26049 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26053 \begin_layout Standard
26054 You can only use the style
26058 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26062 is always possible.
26065 \begin_layout Standard
26066 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26067 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26069 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26070 \begin_inset space ~
26074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26076 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26083 \begin_layout Standard
26084 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26088 \begin_inset space ~
26092 \begin_inset space ~
26097 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26098 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26101 \begin_inset space ~
26106 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26107 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26110 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26116 \begin_layout Standard
26117 You can change labels at any time.
26118 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26119 do not need to think about this.
26122 \begin_layout Standard
26123 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26124 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26125 instead of the reference.
26128 \begin_layout Standard
26129 References are described in detail in the section
26130 \begin_inset space ~
26134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26144 \begin_inset space ~
26152 \begin_layout Section
26153 Table of Contents and other Listings
26154 \begin_inset Index idx
26157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26164 \begin_inset Index idx
26167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26183 \begin_layout Subsection
26185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26187 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26194 \begin_layout Standard
26195 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26197 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26198 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26200 \begin_inset space ~
26204 \begin_inset space ~
26210 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26211 If you click on it, the
26215 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26216 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26217 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26219 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26221 \begin_inset space ~
26226 that is described in section
26227 \begin_inset space ~
26231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26233 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26240 \begin_layout Standard
26241 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26242 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26244 \begin_inset space ~
26248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26250 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26254 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26256 \begin_inset space ~
26260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26262 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26266 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26268 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26271 \begin_layout Subsection
26272 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26275 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26282 \begin_layout Standard
26283 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26285 You can insert them via the
26287 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26291 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26294 \begin_layout Section
26295 URLs and Hyperlinks
26296 \begin_inset Index idx
26299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26306 \begin_inset Index idx
26309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26318 \begin_layout Subsection
26320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26329 \begin_layout Standard
26330 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26332 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26338 \begin_layout Standard
26339 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26340 \begin_inset Flex URL
26343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26353 \begin_layout Standard
26354 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26360 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26364 \begin_layout Standard
26365 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26373 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26381 \begin_layout Subsection
26383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26385 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26392 \begin_layout Standard
26393 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26395 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26398 or with the toolbar button
26405 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26414 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26415 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26416 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26418 name "LyX's homepage"
26419 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26423 , an Email address like this:
26424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26426 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26427 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26432 , or a link to a file.
26435 \begin_layout Standard
26436 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26449 to the link target.
26452 \begin_layout Standard
26453 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26454 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26455 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26456 the text style dialog.
26457 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26461 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26463 name "LyX's homepage"
26464 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26471 \begin_layout Standard
26472 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26476 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26478 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26479 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26483 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26485 \begin_inset Newline newline
26493 \begin_inset Newline newline
26500 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26503 \begin_layout Section
26505 \begin_inset Index idx
26508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26517 name "sec:Appendices"
26524 \begin_layout Standard
26525 Appendices are created with the menu
26527 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26529 \begin_inset space ~
26533 \begin_inset space ~
26539 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26540 as the appendix part of the book.
26541 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26544 \begin_layout Standard
26545 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26546 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26547 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26548 and the subsection number.
26549 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26553 \begin_layout Standard
26555 \begin_inset space ~
26559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26561 reference "chap:Credits"
26566 \begin_inset space ~
26570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26572 reference "sub:Export"
26579 \begin_layout Section
26581 \begin_inset Index idx
26584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26593 name "sec:Bibliography"
26600 \begin_layout Standard
26601 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26602 You can include a bibliography database,
26606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26607 Known under the name
26608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26620 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26621 manually, using the paragraph environment
26625 , which was described in section
26626 \begin_inset space ~
26630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26632 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26637 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26638 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26642 use a bibliography database.
26645 \begin_layout Subsection
26646 The Bibliography Environment
26649 \begin_layout Standard
26654 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26656 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26665 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26667 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26676 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26679 \begin_layout Standard
26680 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26682 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26685 or the toolbar button
26688 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26692 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26693 containing the available citations.
26694 Select one or more keys from the list and
26704 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26705 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26709 \begin_layout Standard
26710 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26711 entry with surrounding brackets.
26716 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26717 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26729 \begin_layout Standard
26732 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26735 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26737 key "latexcompanion"
26744 \begin_layout Standard
26745 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26746 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26755 \begin_layout Standard
26756 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26759 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26761 \begin_inset space ~
26769 arg "layout-paragraph"
26773 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26776 \begin_layout Subsection
26777 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26778 \begin_inset Index idx
26781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26782 Bibliography ! Databases
26788 \begin_inset Index idx
26791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26792 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26800 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26807 \begin_layout Standard
26808 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26814 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26816 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26817 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26822 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26824 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26825 your working field in a database.
26826 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26827 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26828 list for that document.
26829 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26833 \begin_layout Standard
26834 The database is a text file with the file extension
26835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26846 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26847 The format is explained in
26848 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26854 and in the LaTeX books (
26855 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26857 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26862 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26863 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26864 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26865 \begin_inset Flex URL
26868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26870 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26878 \begin_layout Standard
26879 To use a database, use the menu
26881 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26886 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26899 \begin_inset space ~
26905 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26906 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26913 Add bibliography to TOC
26915 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26920 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26921 in the document or just the cited references.
26924 \begin_layout Standard
26925 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26937 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26938 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26939 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26941 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26947 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26948 \begin_inset Newline newline
26952 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26954 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26966 \begin_layout Standard
26967 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26970 \begin_layout Standard
26971 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26972 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
26978 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26979 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26984 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26985 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26986 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27001 The following variants are possible:
27004 \begin_layout Description
27005 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27006 with other bibliography packages (e.
27007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27011 \begin_inset space \space{}
27018 ), only with the package
27022 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27026 \begin_layout Description
27027 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27028 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27029 with all bibliography packages, except
27034 \begin_layout Description
27035 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27040 , works with all bibliography packages
27043 \begin_layout Standard
27044 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27046 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27052 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27061 \begin_layout Standard
27062 When you select the option
27064 Sectioned bibliography
27068 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27069 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27072 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27073 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27075 Customizing Bibliographies
27083 Additional Features
27088 \begin_layout Standard
27089 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27090 the two methods of creating them.
27091 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27092 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27093 We used the style file
27097 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27100 \begin_layout Subsection
27101 Bibliography layout
27102 \begin_inset Index idx
27105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27106 Bibliography ! Layout
27114 \begin_layout Standard
27115 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27116 For this feature you need to enable the option
27122 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27126 \begin_inset Index idx
27129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27130 Document ! Settings
27140 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27141 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27142 in the previous section.
27145 \begin_layout Standard
27146 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27147 the citation reference window.
27148 Here is an example where the text
27149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27153 \begin_inset space ~
27157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27160 appears after the reference:
27163 \begin_layout Standard
27165 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27168 key "latexcompanion"
27175 \begin_layout Section
27177 \begin_inset Index idx
27180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27196 \begin_layout Standard
27197 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27199 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27201 \begin_inset space ~
27206 or the toolbar button
27213 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27214 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27215 by LyX as the index entry.
27218 \begin_layout Standard
27219 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27221 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27222 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27224 \begin_inset space ~
27230 A light blue box labeled
27231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27242 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27243 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27246 \begin_layout Standard
27247 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27248 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27250 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27252 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27259 \begin_layout Subsection
27260 Grouping Index Entries
27261 \begin_inset Index idx
27264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27273 \begin_layout Standard
27274 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27276 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27277 lists under the entry
27278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27286 First we create the entry
27287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27295 \begin_inset space ~
27299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27301 reference "sub:Lists"
27306 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27307 \begin_inset space ~
27311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27313 reference "sec:Itemize"
27317 , we insert the command
27320 \begin_layout Standard
27326 \begin_layout Standard
27330 \begin_layout Standard
27336 \begin_layout Standard
27337 for the enumerated list in section
27338 \begin_inset space ~
27342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27344 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27351 \begin_layout Standard
27352 The exclamation mark
27353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27360 marks the grouping levels.
27361 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27362 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27363 If we don't have an index entry for
27364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27371 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27374 \begin_layout Subsection
27376 \begin_inset Index idx
27379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 Index ! Page ranges
27388 \begin_layout Standard
27389 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27391 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27392 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27393 an index entry in section
27394 \begin_inset space ~
27398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27400 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27407 \begin_layout Standard
27410 Paragraph environments|(
27413 \begin_layout Standard
27414 and another entry at the end of section
27415 \begin_inset space ~
27419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27421 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27428 \begin_layout Standard
27431 Paragraph environments|)
27434 \begin_layout Standard
27436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27459 respectively start and end the index range.
27460 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27461 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27462 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27463 An example is the index entry
27464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27467 Document ! Settings
27468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27474 \begin_layout Subsection
27476 \begin_inset Index idx
27479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27480 Index ! Cross referencing
27488 \begin_layout Standard
27489 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27490 We referred for example in the index entry
27491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27499 \begin_inset space ~
27503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27505 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27509 ) to the index entry
27510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27517 in the same section using the entry
27520 \begin_layout Standard
27523 GIF|see{Image formats}
27526 \begin_layout Standard
27527 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27528 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27529 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27532 \begin_layout Subsection
27534 \begin_inset Index idx
27537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27538 Index ! Entry order
27546 \begin_layout Standard
27547 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27548 follow the rules for the index order.
27549 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27554 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27556 \begin_inset space ~
27560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27562 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27571 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27572 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27597 \begin_inset Index idx
27600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27601 Dummy entries ! maïs
27607 \begin_inset Index idx
27610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27611 Dummy entries ! maître
27617 \begin_inset Index idx
27620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27621 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27626 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27627 maïs, maison, maître.
27628 To achieve this, we use the command
27631 \begin_layout Standard
27634 previous entry@current entry
27637 \begin_layout Standard
27638 In our case we want to have
27639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27654 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27657 \begin_layout Standard
27663 \begin_layout Standard
27664 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27665 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27666 See the next subsection for an example.
27669 \begin_layout Standard
27670 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27676 \begin_layout Standard
27677 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27682 to generate the index (see sec.
27683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27689 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27698 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27706 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27710 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27711 index commands start with
27712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27724 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27729 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27732 \begin_layout Standard
27744 \begin_layout Standard
27756 \begin_layout Subsection
27758 \begin_inset Index idx
27761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27762 Index ! Entry layout
27770 \begin_layout Standard
27771 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27772 \begin_inset Index idx
27775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27778 This is an italic dummy entry
27783 You can also format the page number using the character
27784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27791 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27792 We can write for example
27795 \begin_layout Standard
27798 italic page number:|textit
27801 \begin_layout Standard
27802 to get the page number in italic.
27803 \begin_inset Index idx
27806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27807 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27812 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27830 \begin_inset space ~
27836 Have a look at section
27837 \begin_inset space ~
27841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27843 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27847 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27850 \begin_layout Standard
27851 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27859 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27863 to generate the index, see sec.
27864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27870 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27879 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27884 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27885 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27888 key "latexcompanion"
27900 \begin_layout Standard
27901 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27903 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27904 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27905 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27906 If so, put the following in the preamble
27909 \begin_layout Standard
27921 \begin_layout Standard
27925 \begin_layout Standard
27931 \begin_layout Standard
27932 in the index entry.
27933 \begin_inset Index idx
27936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27937 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27942 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27943 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27944 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27947 \begin_layout Standard
27948 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27949 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27950 a bold font for all index entries.
27951 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27963 documentation for details,
27964 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27966 key "makeindex,xindy"
27973 \begin_layout Subsection
27975 \begin_inset Index idx
27978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27987 name "sub:Index-Program"
27994 \begin_layout Standard
27995 If the index generation program
27999 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28003 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28012 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28013 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28014 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28015 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28016 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28026 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28027 dialog, see section
28028 \begin_inset space ~
28032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28034 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28039 The available options are listed and explained in
28040 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28042 key "makeindex,xindy"
28047 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28051 \begin_layout Standard
28052 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28053 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28056 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28057 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28061 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28062 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28065 \begin_layout Subsection
28069 \begin_layout Standard
28070 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28071 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28079 next to the standard index.
28080 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28081 that add this feature.
28087 \begin_inset Index idx
28090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28091 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28096 package to generate multiple indexes.
28097 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28102 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28103 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28110 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28111 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28112 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28120 \begin_layout Standard
28121 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28123 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28124 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28127 and select the option
28129 Use multiple Indexes
28136 already contains the standard index
28137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28145 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28146 also appear as a heading) to the
28150 input field and press the
28155 The new index now also appears in the list.
28156 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28160 \begin_layout Standard
28161 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28164 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28171 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28172 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28173 are additional features:
28176 \begin_layout Itemize
28177 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28178 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28181 \begin_layout Itemize
28182 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28183 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28191 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28192 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28193 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28194 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28197 \begin_layout Section
28198 Nomenclature/Glossary
28199 \begin_inset Index idx
28202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28209 \begin_inset Index idx
28212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28243 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28250 \begin_layout Standard
28251 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28252 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28253 called nomenclature or glossary.
28256 \begin_layout Standard
28257 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28263 \begin_inset Index idx
28266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28267 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28273 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28274 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28280 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28283 \begin_layout Standard
28284 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28285 and then use the menu
28287 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28293 \begin_inset space ~
28298 or the toolbar button
28301 arg "nomencl-insert"
28306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28317 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28320 \begin_layout Standard
28321 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28322 The first is the term or
28326 that you wish to define.
28331 of the term or symbol.
28334 \begin_layout Standard
28335 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28343 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28351 \begin_layout Subsection
28352 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28353 \begin_inset Index idx
28356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28357 Nomenclature ! Layout
28365 \begin_layout Standard
28366 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28370 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28376 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28384 \begin_inset Newline newline
28392 \begin_inset Newline newline
28398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28405 character starts/ends the formula.
28406 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28418 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28428 \begin_layout Standard
28429 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28430 \begin_inset space ~
28434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28436 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28443 \begin_layout Standard
28447 \begin_inset space ~
28452 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28453 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28458 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28465 in this document is:
28466 \begin_inset Newline newline
28471 dummy entry for the character
28476 \begin_inset Newline newline
28488 \begin_inset space ~
28498 font use the command
28527 \begin_layout Standard
28528 If the characters |
28529 \begin_inset space \space{}
28533 \begin_inset space \space{}
28537 \begin_inset space \space{}
28541 \begin_inset space \space{}
28545 \begin_inset space \space{}
28548 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28549 a quote character in front of them.
28550 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28551 LatexCommand nomenclature
28552 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28553 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28560 \begin_layout Subsection
28561 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28562 \begin_inset Index idx
28565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28566 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28574 \begin_layout Standard
28575 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28576 the symbol definition.
28577 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28579 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28582 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28583 LatexCommand nomenclature
28585 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28592 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28596 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28597 LatexCommand nomenclature
28600 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28605 They will be sorted by
28606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28632 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28635 will be sorted before the
28639 since the character
28640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28647 is considered in sorting.
28650 \begin_layout Standard
28651 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28654 \begin_inset space ~
28659 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28660 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28662 For the example given, you can insert
28666 in this field for the
28667 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28674 will be located before
28675 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28681 \begin_layout Standard
28682 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28687 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28696 \begin_layout Subsection
28697 Nomenclature Options
28698 \begin_inset Index idx
28701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28702 Nomenclature ! Options
28710 \begin_layout Standard
28715 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28716 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28719 \begin_layout Description
28720 refeq Appends the phrase
28721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28736 to every nomenclature entry, where
28742 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28745 \begin_layout Description
28746 refpage Appends the phrase
28747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28762 to every nomenclature entry, where
28768 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28771 \begin_layout Description
28772 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28775 \begin_layout Standard
28776 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28777 class options list in the
28779 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28783 In this document the options
28790 \begin_layout Standard
28791 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28797 \begin_layout Standard
28798 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28799 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28804 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28807 \begin_layout Description
28817 \begin_layout Description
28820 nomrefpage Like the
28827 \begin_layout Description
28830 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28839 \begin_layout Description
28843 \begin_inset space ~
28849 \begin_inset space ~
28854 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28857 \begin_layout Standard
28859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28866 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28867 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28870 \begin_layout Standard
28878 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28881 \begin_inset Newline newline
28888 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28893 \begin_inset Newline newline
28897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28912 by their translation.
28915 \begin_layout Subsection
28916 Printing the Nomenclature
28917 \begin_inset Index idx
28920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28921 Nomenclature ! Printing
28929 \begin_layout Standard
28930 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28932 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28933 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28949 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28950 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28951 You can choose between these settings:
28954 \begin_layout Description
28955 Default a space of 1
28956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28962 \begin_layout Description
28964 \begin_inset space ~
28968 \begin_inset space ~
28971 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28974 \begin_layout Description
28975 Custom custom space
28978 \begin_layout Standard
28979 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28988 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28996 For example, in order to change the name to
29000 , add the following line to the preamble:
29003 \begin_layout Standard
29011 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29014 \begin_layout Subsection
29015 Nomenclature Program
29016 \begin_inset Index idx
29019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29020 Nomenclature ! Program
29026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29028 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29035 \begin_layout Standard
29036 LyX uses the program
29040 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29041 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29046 by adding options, see section
29047 \begin_inset space ~
29051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29053 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29058 The available options are listed and explained in
29059 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29061 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29068 \begin_layout Section
29070 \begin_inset Index idx
29073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29080 \begin_inset Index idx
29083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29084 Document ! Branches
29090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29092 name "sec:Branches"
29099 \begin_layout Standard
29100 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29101 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29102 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29103 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29106 \begin_layout Standard
29107 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29108 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29109 To create a branch, either select the menu
29111 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29112 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29115 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29117 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29124 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29125 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29126 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29127 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29128 (see below for an example).
29129 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29130 to the name of the other) and to add
29131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29143 \begin_inset space ~
29146 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29147 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29150 \begin_layout Standard
29151 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29152 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29154 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29157 where you can choose a branch.
29158 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29162 \begin_layout Standard
29163 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29164 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29167 \begin_layout Standard
29168 \begin_inset Branch Question
29171 \begin_layout Standard
29172 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29180 \begin_layout Standard
29181 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29184 \begin_layout Standard
29185 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29193 \begin_layout Standard
29200 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29201 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29204 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29205 Consider for example a file
29206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29213 which has the above branches.
29215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29222 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29246 branch were inactive,
29247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29262 branch was active, likewise
29263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29278 branch was active, and
29279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29282 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29286 if both branches were active.
29287 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29290 \begin_layout Standard
29291 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29297 \begin_layout Standard
29298 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29299 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29301 For example you can define for the question branch
29305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29306 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29307 \begin_inset space ~
29311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29313 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29325 \begin_layout Standard
29335 \begin_layout Standard
29345 \begin_layout Standard
29346 and for the answer branch
29349 \begin_layout Standard
29359 \begin_layout Standard
29369 \begin_layout Standard
29370 \begin_inset Branch Question
29373 \begin_layout Standard
29377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29405 \begin_layout Standard
29406 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29409 \begin_layout Standard
29413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29441 \begin_layout Standard
29442 Now it is possible to use the
29446 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29453 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29456 commands to obtain conditional output.
29457 Here is an example formula where only the
29464 \begin_inset Formula
29466 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29474 \begin_layout Standard
29475 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29483 \begin_layout Standard
29484 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29490 \begin_inset space \space{}
29493 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29494 For this advanced usage, see the
29499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29502 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29509 \begin_layout Section
29511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29513 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29518 \begin_inset Index idx
29521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29530 \begin_layout Standard
29533 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29534 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29537 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29539 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29544 \begin_inset Index idx
29547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29548 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29553 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29554 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29555 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29556 part of the document.
29560 \begin_layout Standard
29561 The header information in the dialog tab
29565 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29566 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29567 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29568 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29572 \begin_inset space ~
29576 \begin_inset space ~
29581 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29582 title and author entries.
29586 \begin_inset space ~
29590 \begin_inset space ~
29594 \begin_inset space ~
29599 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29602 \begin_layout Standard
29603 You can specify in the dialog tab
29607 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29612 \begin_inset space ~
29616 \begin_inset space ~
29620 \begin_inset space ~
29625 option allows long links to be split;
29628 \begin_inset space ~
29632 \begin_inset space ~
29636 \begin_inset space ~
29644 \begin_inset space ~
29649 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29652 \begin_inset space ~
29657 colors the different links.
29658 The default colors are:
29661 \begin_layout Labeling
29662 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29667 for hyperlinks and URLs
29670 \begin_layout Labeling
29671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29679 \begin_layout Labeling
29680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29688 \begin_layout Standard
29689 but you can change these in the field
29694 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29697 \begin_layout Standard
29700 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29703 \begin_layout Standard
29708 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29709 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29710 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29713 \begin_layout Standard
29718 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29719 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29720 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29730 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29731 when opening the PDF.
29733 \begin_inset space ~
29736 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29737 \begin_inset space ~
29740 1 will only display the sections.
29743 \begin_layout Standard
29744 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29745 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29751 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29752 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29761 \begin_layout Section
29762 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29765 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29772 \begin_layout Subsection
29774 \begin_inset Index idx
29777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29786 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29793 \begin_layout Standard
29794 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29795 constructs, but not all.
29796 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29797 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29798 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29799 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
29800 and their commands.
29803 \begin_layout Standard
29804 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29806 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29808 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29821 \begin_inset space ~
29826 or by the toolbar button
29839 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29847 \begin_layout Standard
29848 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29849 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29850 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29851 using the LaTeX-command
29857 , you can write the command part
29863 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29867 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29868 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29869 the following example:
29872 \begin_layout Standard
29873 \begin_inset Graphics
29874 filename clipart/ERT.png
29882 \begin_layout Standard
29886 \begin_layout Standard
29887 This is a line with a
29891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29914 \begin_layout Standard
29915 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29923 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29924 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29932 \begin_layout Subsection
29933 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29934 \begin_inset Argument 1
29937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29944 \begin_inset Index idx
29947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29956 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29963 \begin_layout Standard
29964 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29965 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29966 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29975 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29976 any time if you know the right commands.
29977 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29978 is the end of the day.
29979 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29980 all caption labels bold.
29981 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29983 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29987 \begin_layout Standard
29988 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29989 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29990 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
29992 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30001 \begin_layout Standard
30002 As result you find that the package
30007 \begin_inset Index idx
30010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30011 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30017 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30019 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30022 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30037 \begin_inset space ~
30045 \begin_layout Standard
30050 usepackage[options]{package name}
30053 \begin_layout Standard
30054 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30055 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30056 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30059 \begin_layout Standard
30060 In your case the package name is
30065 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30070 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30071 So you add the command
30074 \begin_layout Standard
30079 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30082 \begin_layout Standard
30083 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30088 For more commands provided by the
30092 package, have a look at its documentation,
30093 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30107 \begin_layout Standard
30108 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30110 For example if you use a
30114 class, you don't need the package
30118 , you can instead write
30121 \begin_layout Standard
30126 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30131 \begin_layout Standard
30132 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30133 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30134 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30141 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30144 \begin_layout Standard
30145 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30146 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30148 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30149 the previous section.
30152 \begin_layout Standard
30153 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30155 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30157 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30164 \begin_layout Standard
30165 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30171 \begin_layout Standard
30175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30185 \begin_inset Note Note
30188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30189 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30197 \begin_layout Left Header
30198 \begin_inset Argument 1
30201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30221 \begin_inset Note Note
30224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30225 defines the header line as described below
30233 \begin_layout Center Header
30234 \begin_inset Argument 1
30237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30246 \begin_layout Right Header
30247 \begin_inset Argument 1
30250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30271 \begin_layout Left Footer
30272 \begin_inset Argument 1
30275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30296 \begin_layout Center Footer
30297 \begin_inset Argument 1
30300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30311 \begin_inset Newline newline
30315 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30321 \begin_layout Right Footer
30322 \begin_inset Argument 1
30325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30347 \begin_layout Section
30348 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30351 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30356 \begin_inset Index idx
30359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30360 Document ! Header/Footer line
30366 \begin_inset Index idx
30369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30378 \begin_layout Standard
30379 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30383 \begin_inset space ~
30394 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30400 \begin_inset space ~
30406 As a second step add in the menu
30408 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30409 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30416 Custom Header/Footerlines
30417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30421 This module offers the following 6
30422 \begin_inset space ~
30428 \begin_layout Description
30430 \begin_inset space ~
30434 \begin_inset space ~
30438 \begin_inset space ~
30442 \begin_inset space ~
30446 \begin_inset space ~
30452 \begin_layout Description
30454 \begin_inset space ~
30458 \begin_inset space ~
30462 \begin_inset space ~
30466 \begin_inset space ~
30470 \begin_inset space ~
30476 \begin_layout Standard
30477 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30480 \begin_layout Standard
30481 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30482 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30484 \begin_inset space ~
30488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30490 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30494 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30497 \begin_layout Standard
30498 \begin_inset Float figure
30504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30507 \begin_inset Tabular
30508 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30509 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30510 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30511 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30512 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30514 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30532 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30543 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30561 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30572 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30576 The normal text on the page goes here.
30577 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30579 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30580 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30585 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30594 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30605 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30623 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30634 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30652 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30670 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30675 name "fig:Page-layout"
30679 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30692 \begin_layout Standard
30693 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30701 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30705 \begin_inset space ~
30710 is set to “Default”.
30711 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30720 \begin_layout Subsection
30724 \begin_layout Standard
30725 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30726 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30727 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30728 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30730 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30731 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30734 \begin_layout Standard
30735 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30738 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30751 \begin_inset space ~
30759 \begin_layout Description
30762 thepage prints the current page number
30765 \begin_layout Description
30768 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30771 \begin_layout Description
30774 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30777 \begin_layout Description
30780 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30781 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30788 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30791 because it usually goes in a left header.
30794 \begin_layout Description
30797 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30798 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30800 It is normally used in the right header.
30803 \begin_layout Subsection
30804 Default header/footer
30807 \begin_layout Standard
30808 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30809 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30810 footer has the page number.
30811 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30812 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30813 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30816 \begin_inset space ~
30824 \begin_layout Subsection
30828 \begin_layout Standard
30829 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30830 Some pages are different.
30831 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30832 a new part or chapter in your book.
30833 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30834 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30835 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30839 Header and footer decoration line
30842 \begin_layout Standard
30843 By default, you get a 0.4
30844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30847 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30848 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30860 in the following way:
30863 \begin_layout Standard
30870 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30873 \begin_layout Standard
30874 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30883 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30890 \begin_layout Standard
30891 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30892 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30893 \begin_inset space ~
30897 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30906 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30907 Several header/footer lines
30910 \begin_layout Standard
30911 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30912 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30913 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30915 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30929 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30930 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30943 \begin_inset space ~
30951 \begin_layout Standard
30958 headheight}{height}
30961 \begin_layout Standard
30962 where height is a size in standard units.
30963 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30964 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30965 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
30967 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30984 \begin_inset space ~
30989 to see if you can find a warning about the package
30994 \begin_inset Index idx
30997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30998 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31004 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31005 for your header/footer.
31008 \begin_layout Subsection
31012 \begin_layout Standard
31013 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31014 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31015 This example consists of the following definition:
31018 \begin_layout Description
31020 \begin_inset space ~
31029 , empty optional argument
31032 \begin_layout Description
31034 \begin_inset space ~
31037 Header empty, empty optional argument
31040 \begin_layout Description
31042 \begin_inset space ~
31051 in the optional argument
31054 \begin_layout Description
31056 \begin_inset space ~
31065 in the optional argument
31068 \begin_layout Description
31070 \begin_inset space ~
31082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31086 \begin_inset Newline newline
31090 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31097 in the optional argument
31100 \begin_layout Description
31102 \begin_inset space ~
31111 , empty optional argument
31114 \begin_layout Description
31117 headrulewidth set to 2
31118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31124 \begin_layout Standard
31125 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31126 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31132 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31141 \begin_layout Standard
31142 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31148 \begin_layout Standard
31152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31156 pagestyle{headings}
31162 \begin_inset Note Note
31165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31166 switches back to page style with the default headings
31174 \begin_layout Section
31175 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31178 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31183 \begin_inset Index idx
31186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31193 \begin_inset Index idx
31196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31205 \begin_layout Standard
31206 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31207 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31208 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31211 \begin_layout Subsection
31215 \begin_layout Standard
31216 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31221 \begin_inset Index idx
31224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31225 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31230 (on some systems named simply
31235 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31237 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31243 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31244 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31252 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31253 automatically installed together with LyX.
31256 \begin_layout Subsection
31260 \begin_layout Standard
31261 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31262 LaTeX, activate the option
31265 \begin_inset space ~
31272 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31278 \begin_inset space ~
31282 \begin_inset space ~
31285 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31292 \begin_inset space ~
31305 \begin_inset space ~
31310 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31313 \begin_layout Standard
31314 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31318 \begin_inset space ~
31326 \begin_inset space ~
31334 \begin_layout Standard
31335 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31339 \begin_layout Standard
31340 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31348 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31349 generated by activating the option
31352 \begin_inset space ~
31358 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31366 \begin_layout Subsection
31367 Selected document parts
31370 \begin_layout Standard
31371 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31372 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31373 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31374 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31376 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31380 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31381 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31382 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31385 \begin_layout Standard
31386 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31392 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31403 is explained in section
31405 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31410 \begin_inset space ~
31420 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31421 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31423 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31425 Here is the result:
31428 \begin_layout Standard
31429 \begin_inset Preview
31431 \begin_layout Standard
31436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31440 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31446 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31456 height_special "totalheight"
31459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31484 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31490 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31512 \begin_layout Standard
31513 Previewing works also for colors.
31514 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31532 is explained in section
31539 \begin_inset space ~
31552 \begin_layout Standard
31553 \begin_inset Preview
31555 \begin_layout Standard
31559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31578 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31583 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31602 \begin_layout Standard
31603 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31609 \begin_layout Standard
31610 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31611 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31612 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31614 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31615 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31616 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31617 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31621 \begin_layout Subsection
31625 \begin_layout Standard
31626 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31629 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31631 \begin_inset space ~
31636 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31637 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31639 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31640 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31641 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31642 the source view window.
31647 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31648 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31649 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31652 \begin_layout Section
31653 Advanced Find and Replace
31654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31656 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31661 \begin_inset Index idx
31664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31671 \begin_inset Index idx
31674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31683 \begin_layout Subsection
31687 \begin_layout Standard
31688 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31689 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31690 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31691 The key-features are:
31694 \begin_layout Itemize
31695 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31696 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31697 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31701 \begin_layout Itemize
31702 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31703 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31704 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31705 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31708 \begin_layout Itemize
31709 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31710 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31711 outside of mathematics environments
31714 \begin_layout Itemize
31715 Search may be widened to a specific
31720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31724 \begin_inset space ~
31727 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31728 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31735 \begin_layout Itemize
31736 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31737 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31742 \begin_inset space ~
31745 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31748 \begin_layout Subsection
31752 \begin_layout Standard
31753 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31755 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31768 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31771 ) or the toolbar button
31774 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31780 Advanced Find and Replace
31785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31789 \begin_layout Standard
31794 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31798 \begin_inset space ~
31803 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31806 arg "break-paragraph"
31810 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31811 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31815 arg "break-paragraph"
31818 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31822 searches backwards.
31825 \begin_layout Standard
31829 \begin_inset space ~
31834 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31843 \begin_inset space ~
31848 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31852 Searching for mathematics
31855 \begin_layout Standard
31856 Mathematical formulas, such as
31857 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31860 or something more complex like
31861 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31864 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31869 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31870 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31871 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31872 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31882 \begin_layout Standard
31883 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31884 This is done by switching to the
31888 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31893 This way, entering in the
31900 \begin_layout Itemize
31901 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31902 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31905 \begin_layout Itemize
31906 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31907 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31910 \begin_layout Itemize
31911 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31912 of it only within section headings.
31913 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31914 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31918 \begin_layout Itemize
31919 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31920 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31927 \begin_layout Standard
31928 The entries made in the
31932 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31935 \begin_inset space ~
31941 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31945 button or alternatively press
31948 arg "break-paragraph"
31955 while the cursor is in the
31958 \begin_inset space ~
31966 \begin_layout Standard
31967 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
31968 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31972 \begin_layout Itemize
31973 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31974 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31982 with its typewriter version
31983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31997 \begin_layout Itemize
31998 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32004 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32016 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32023 (you may want to enable the
32026 \begin_inset space ~
32034 \begin_inset space ~
32039 options and disable the
32047 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32055 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32056 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32060 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32063 , or occurrences of
32064 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32068 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32074 \begin_layout Subsection
32078 \begin_layout Standard
32079 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32084 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32088 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32097 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32103 This is done with the context menu
32105 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32106 Insert Regular Expression
32108 while the cursor is in the
32113 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32114 expression matching rules
32118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32119 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32125 \begin_inset space ~
32128 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32129 to match expressions.
32134 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32135 same text in the document.
32136 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32137 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32140 \begin_layout Enumerate
32141 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32146 editor the fraction
32147 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32151 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32154 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32155 fractions with the given denominator.
32158 \begin_layout Enumerate
32159 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32171 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32176 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32177 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32178 Also, by inserting a
32179 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32182 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32183 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32186 \begin_layout Standard
32187 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32188 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32189 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32192 , and referring back to them through
32193 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32197 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32201 For example, try searching with the regexp
32202 \begin_inset Newline newline
32205 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32208 \begin_inset Newline newline
32211 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32214 \begin_layout Standard
32215 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32218 \begin_layout Standard
32219 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32227 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32228 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32229 sub-expressions is absolute.
32231 \begin_inset space ~
32235 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32238 always refers to the first occurrence of
32239 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32242 in all entered regexps.
32250 \begin_layout Section
32252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32254 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32259 \begin_inset Index idx
32262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32271 \begin_layout Standard
32272 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32275 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32282 key or the toolbar button
32285 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32288 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32289 beginning of the currently selected text.
32290 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32291 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32292 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32293 scrolled so that it is visible.
32294 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32295 n, if any could be found.
32296 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32300 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32301 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32304 \begin_layout Standard
32305 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32308 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32312 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32313 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32314 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32315 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32318 \begin_inset space ~
32326 arg "dialog-show character"
32329 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32330 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32333 \begin_layout Standard
32334 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32335 \begin_inset Newline newline
32339 \begin_inset Flex URL
32342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32344 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32350 \begin_inset Newline newline
32354 \begin_inset space ~
32357 files for each language.
32358 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32359 \begin_inset space ~
32362 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32371 \begin_inset Newline newline
32374 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32375 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32376 but in most cases these are
32392 is the language code.
32395 \begin_layout Subsection
32399 \begin_layout Standard
32402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32403 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32405 \begin_inset space ~
32408 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32411 you can set the following things:
32414 \begin_layout Description
32416 \begin_inset space ~
32419 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32420 Depending on your platform,
32434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32435 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32436 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32451 \begin_layout Description
32453 \begin_inset space ~
32456 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32457 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32460 \begin_layout Description
32462 \begin_inset space ~
32465 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32471 \begin_inset space \space{}
32475 This should normally not be needed.
32478 \begin_layout Description
32480 \begin_inset space ~
32484 \begin_inset space ~
32487 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32499 \begin_layout Description
32501 \begin_inset space ~
32504 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32505 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32506 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32507 appear in a context menu.
32508 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32512 \begin_layout Description
32514 \begin_inset space ~
32518 \begin_inset space ~
32522 \begin_inset space ~
32525 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32529 \begin_layout Section
32531 \begin_inset Index idx
32534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32543 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32550 \begin_layout Standard
32551 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32552 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32562 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32564 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32573 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32574 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32575 which are available for many languages.
32578 \begin_layout Standard
32579 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32583 \begin_layout Subsection
32584 Setting up the thesaurus
32587 \begin_layout Standard
32596 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32600 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32605 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32611 \begin_inset space ~
32619 For instance, the US English files are named:
32622 \begin_layout Itemize
32626 \begin_layout Itemize
32630 \begin_layout Standard
32639 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32640 and you just need to point LyX (in
32642 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32643 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32644 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32646 \begin_inset space ~
32651 ) to the path where they are installed.
32655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32656 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32657 ies, typical locations are
32663 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32667 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32671 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32674 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32680 LibreOffice-<Version>
32687 On the Mac, the default location is
32689 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32690 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32691 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32692 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32693 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32694 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32702 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32703 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32704 correct place right away.
32707 \begin_layout Standard
32708 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32709 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32713 \begin_layout Itemize
32714 \begin_inset Flex URL
32717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32719 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32727 \begin_layout Standard
32728 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32729 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32731 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32732 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32733 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32735 \begin_inset space ~
32741 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32742 and point LyX there.
32745 \begin_layout Standard
32746 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32748 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32751 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32757 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32760 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32768 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32769 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32770 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32772 \begin_inset space ~
32777 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32780 \begin_layout Subsection
32781 Using the thesaurus
32784 \begin_layout Standard
32785 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32787 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32790 or the toolbar button
32793 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32796 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32798 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32800 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32801 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32802 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32811 ), related terms (such as
32814 \begin_inset space ~
32823 ), compounds (such as
32826 \begin_inset space ~
32835 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32844 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32847 \begin_layout Standard
32848 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32849 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32853 \begin_layout Standard
32854 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32855 the dictionary, such as the above
32859 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32864 \begin_inset space \space{}
32867 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32868 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32869 For example, looking up the word form
32873 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32878 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32883 \begin_inset space \space{}
32894 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32895 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32896 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32899 \begin_layout Section
32901 \begin_inset Index idx
32904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32911 \begin_inset Index idx
32914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32915 Document ! Change Tracking
32921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32923 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32930 \begin_layout Standard
32931 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32932 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32933 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32934 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32936 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32938 \begin_inset space ~
32941 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32943 \begin_inset space ~
32951 \begin_layout Standard
32952 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32966 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32967 You can change the color in
32969 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32970 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32972 \begin_inset space ~
32976 \begin_inset space ~
32981 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
32987 \begin_inset Index idx
32990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32991 Color ! Change tracking
32996 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32997 the cursor is in changed text.
32998 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33001 arg "changes-merge"
33007 \begin_layout Standard
33008 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33009 \begin_inset Index idx
33012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33021 \begin_layout Standard
33022 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33028 \begin_layout Standard
33029 \begin_inset Graphics
33030 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33038 \begin_layout Standard
33039 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33045 \begin_layout Standard
33046 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33049 \begin_layout Standard
33050 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33056 \begin_layout Standard
33057 \begin_inset Tabular
33058 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33059 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33060 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33061 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33071 arg "changes-track"
33079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33085 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33087 \begin_inset space ~
33090 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33092 \begin_inset space ~
33101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33110 arg "changes-output"
33118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33124 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33126 \begin_inset space ~
33129 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33131 \begin_inset space ~
33135 \begin_inset space ~
33139 \begin_inset space ~
33148 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33169 Jumps to the next change
33175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33184 arg "change-accept"
33192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33198 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33200 \begin_inset space ~
33203 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33205 \begin_inset space ~
33214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33223 arg "change-reject"
33231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33237 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33242 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33244 \begin_inset space ~
33253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33262 arg "changes-merge"
33270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33276 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33278 \begin_inset space ~
33281 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33283 \begin_inset space ~
33292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33301 arg "all-changes-accept"
33309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33315 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33317 \begin_inset space ~
33320 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33322 \begin_inset space ~
33326 \begin_inset space ~
33335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33344 arg "all-changes-reject"
33352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33358 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33360 \begin_inset space ~
33363 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33365 \begin_inset space ~
33369 \begin_inset space ~
33378 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33401 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33402 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33415 \begin_inset space ~
33424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33447 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33449 \begin_inset space ~
33465 \begin_layout Standard
33466 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33472 \begin_layout Standard
33473 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33493 \begin_layout Standard
33494 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33495 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33496 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33497 the next change after the current cursor position.
33498 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33499 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33500 step to the next change.
33501 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33504 \begin_layout Standard
33505 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33506 to describe a change.
33509 \begin_layout Standard
33510 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33515 \begin_inset Index idx
33518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33519 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33525 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33526 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33532 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33535 \begin_layout Section
33536 Comparison of Documents
33537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33539 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33544 \begin_inset Index idx
33547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33548 Comparison of documents
33556 \begin_layout Standard
33557 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33559 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33563 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33565 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33566 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33570 \begin_inset space ~
33574 \begin_inset space ~
33578 \begin_inset space ~
33587 \begin_inset space ~
33591 \begin_inset space ~
33595 \begin_inset space ~
33599 \begin_inset space ~
33603 \begin_inset space ~
33607 \begin_inset space ~
33612 enables the change tracking option
33615 \begin_inset space ~
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33623 \begin_inset space ~
33628 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33631 \begin_layout Section
33632 International Support
33633 \begin_inset Index idx
33636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33637 International support
33645 \begin_layout Standard
33646 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33647 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33648 up LyX to use them:
33649 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33651 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33658 \begin_layout Standard
33659 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33660 \begin_inset space ~
33664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33666 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33673 \begin_layout Subsection
33675 \begin_inset Index idx
33678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33685 \begin_inset Index idx
33688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33689 Document ! Settings
33695 \begin_inset Index idx
33698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33699 Document ! Language
33707 \begin_layout Standard
33710 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33711 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33714 dialog lets you set
33716 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33721 \begin_layout Standard
33726 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33730 \begin_inset space ~
33735 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33736 For details about the different encoding options see section
33737 \begin_inset space ~
33741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33743 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33750 \begin_layout Subsection
33751 Keyboard mapping configuration
33752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33754 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33761 \begin_layout Standard
33762 If you have for example a U.
33763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33766 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33767 can use an alternate keymap.
33768 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33769 use an Italian keymap.
33772 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33773 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33774 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33777 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33778 \begin_inset space ~
33782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33784 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33789 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33790 which one you want to use.
33793 \begin_layout Standard
33794 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33795 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33796 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33800 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33801 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33802 one to support the characters you want.
33803 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33810 \begin_layout Chapter
33813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33815 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33822 \begin_layout Standard
33823 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33824 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33825 topic inside the user's guide.
33828 \begin_layout Section
33830 \begin_inset Index idx
33833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33842 \begin_layout Standard
33847 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33850 \begin_layout Subsection
33854 \begin_layout Standard
33855 Creates a new document.
33858 \begin_layout Subsection
33862 \begin_layout Standard
33863 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33864 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33865 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33868 \begin_layout Subsection
33872 \begin_layout Standard
33876 \begin_layout Subsection
33880 \begin_layout Standard
33881 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33882 Click there on a file to open it.
33885 \begin_layout Subsection
33889 \begin_layout Standard
33890 Closes the current document.
33893 \begin_layout Subsection
33897 \begin_layout Standard
33898 Closes all opened documents.
33901 \begin_layout Subsection
33905 \begin_layout Standard
33906 Saves the actual document.
33909 \begin_layout Subsection
33913 \begin_layout Standard
33914 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33917 \begin_layout Subsection
33921 \begin_layout Standard
33922 Saves all opened documents.
33925 \begin_layout Subsection
33929 \begin_layout Standard
33930 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33933 \begin_layout Subsection
33937 \begin_layout Standard
33938 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33939 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33940 It is described in the section
33942 Version Control in LyX
33946 Additional Features
33951 \begin_layout Subsection
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33956 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33957 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33959 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33962 \begin_layout Standard
33963 When using the menu entry
33966 \begin_inset space ~
33971 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33975 \begin_inset space ~
33979 \begin_inset space ~
33983 \begin_inset space ~
33988 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33989 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33992 \begin_layout Subsection
33994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34003 \begin_layout Standard
34004 You can export your document to various file formats.
34005 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34006 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34007 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34010 \begin_layout Standard
34011 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34013 \begin_inset space ~
34017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34019 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34026 \begin_layout Description
34032 \begin_inset space ~
34039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34046 yX format of the special LyX
34047 \begin_inset space ~
34050 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34051 \begin_inset Newline newline
34054 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34057 \begin_layout Description
34058 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34064 \begin_layout Description
34066 \begin_inset space ~
34069 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34075 \begin_layout Description
34076 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34077 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34078 files paths or file names in your document.
34079 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34086 \begin_layout Description
34087 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34088 in files paths or file names
34091 \begin_layout Description
34093 \begin_inset space ~
34100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34107 eX) DVI-format using the program
34111 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34114 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34122 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34130 \begin_layout Description
34132 \begin_inset space ~
34135 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34139 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34144 \begin_layout Description
34145 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34149 \begin_layout Description
34151 \begin_inset space ~
34155 \begin_inset space ~
34158 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34162 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34170 \begin_layout Description
34177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34185 \begin_inset space ~
34196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34209 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34214 \begin_layout Description
34221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34229 \begin_inset space ~
34234 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34235 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34239 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34242 \begin_layout Description
34249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34257 \begin_inset space ~
34262 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34263 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34271 \begin_layout Description
34278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34286 \begin_inset space ~
34297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34310 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34315 \begin_layout Description
34317 \begin_inset space ~
34321 \begin_inset space ~
34330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34339 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34340 music notation software
34345 \begin_layout Description
34352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34362 \begin_inset space ~
34366 \begin_inset space ~
34369 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34370 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34371 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34374 \begin_layout Description
34381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34391 \begin_inset space ~
34394 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34410 represent the version number)
34413 \begin_layout Description
34420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34429 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34432 \begin_layout Description
34433 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34438 \begin_layout Description
34439 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34441 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34444 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34448 \begin_layout Description
34452 \begin_inset space ~
34457 PDF-format using the program
34461 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34464 \begin_layout Description
34468 \begin_inset space ~
34475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34484 PDF-format using the program
34488 , produces PDF-files directly
34491 \begin_layout Description
34495 \begin_inset space ~
34500 PDF-format using the program
34504 , produces PDF-files directly
34507 \begin_layout Description
34511 \begin_inset space ~
34516 PDF-format using the program
34520 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34523 \begin_layout Description
34527 \begin_inset space ~
34534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34543 PDF-format using the program
34547 , produces PDF-files directly
34550 \begin_layout Description
34554 \begin_inset space ~
34562 \begin_layout Description
34566 \begin_inset space ~
34570 \begin_inset space ~
34575 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34576 and then exported as text using the program
34581 \begin_layout Description
34586 PostScript format using the program
34591 \begin_layout Description
34592 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34593 programming language
34606 it is possible to use
34613 \begin_layout Standard
34614 If one of the menu entries
34621 \begin_inset space ~
34630 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34631 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34632 \begin_inset space ~
34636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34638 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34643 \begin_inset Index idx
34646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34647 Reconfiguration of LyX
34655 \begin_layout Subsection
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34661 format or send it to a printer.
34662 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34663 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34669 For more information have a look at section
34670 \begin_inset space ~
34674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34676 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34683 \begin_layout Subsection
34687 \begin_layout Standard
34688 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34689 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34690 prefix, see section
34691 \begin_inset space ~
34695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34697 reference "sec:Paths"
34702 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34711 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34712 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34713 \begin_inset space ~
34717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34719 reference "sub:Converters"
34726 \begin_layout Subsection
34727 New and Close Window
34730 \begin_layout Standard
34731 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34734 \begin_layout Subsection
34738 \begin_layout Standard
34739 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34742 \begin_layout Section
34744 \begin_inset Index idx
34747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34756 \begin_layout Subsection
34760 \begin_layout Standard
34761 Described in section
34762 \begin_inset space ~
34766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34768 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34775 \begin_layout Subsection
34776 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34779 \begin_layout Standard
34780 Described in section
34781 \begin_inset space ~
34785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34787 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34794 \begin_layout Subsection
34798 \begin_layout Standard
34799 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34800 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34803 \begin_layout Subsection
34807 \begin_layout Standard
34808 Selects the whole document.
34811 \begin_layout Subsection
34812 Find & Replace (Quick)
34815 \begin_layout Standard
34816 Described in section
34817 \begin_inset space ~
34821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34823 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34830 \begin_layout Subsection
34831 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34835 Described in section
34836 \begin_inset space ~
34840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34842 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34849 \begin_layout Subsection
34850 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34853 \begin_layout Standard
34854 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34858 \begin_layout Subsection
34862 \begin_layout Standard
34863 Described in section
34864 \begin_inset space ~
34868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34870 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34877 \begin_layout Subsection
34879 \begin_inset Index idx
34882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34883 Paragraph ! Settings
34891 \begin_layout Standard
34892 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34893 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34897 \begin_layout Standard
34898 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34899 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34905 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34906 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34908 \begin_inset space ~
34916 \begin_layout Subsection
34920 \begin_layout Standard
34921 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34922 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34923 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34927 \begin_layout Standard
34928 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34930 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34931 The properties of tables are described in section
34932 \begin_inset space ~
34936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34938 reference "sec:Tables"
34942 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34943 \begin_inset space ~
34947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34949 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34956 \begin_layout Subsection
34957 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34960 \begin_layout Standard
34961 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34963 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34964 \begin_inset space ~
34968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34970 reference "sec:Nesting"
34975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34977 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
34984 \begin_layout Section
34986 \begin_inset Index idx
34989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34998 \begin_layout Standard
34999 At the bottom of the
35003 menu the opened documents are listed.
35006 \begin_layout Subsection
35007 Open/Close all Insets
35010 \begin_layout Standard
35011 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35014 \begin_layout Subsection
35015 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35018 \begin_layout Standard
35019 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35022 \begin_layout Standard
35023 Math macros are described in the
35030 \begin_layout Subsection
35034 \begin_layout Standard
35035 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35036 \begin_inset space ~
35040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35042 reference "sec:Navigating"
35047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35049 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35056 \begin_layout Subsection
35060 \begin_layout Standard
35061 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35063 \begin_inset space ~
35067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35069 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35076 \begin_layout Subsection
35080 \begin_layout Standard
35081 Opens a window showing console messages.
35082 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35086 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35087 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35090 \begin_layout Subsection
35092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35094 name "sub:Toolbars"
35099 \begin_inset Index idx
35102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35111 \begin_layout Standard
35112 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35113 All toolbars and the
35116 \begin_inset space ~
35121 can be turned on and off.
35126 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35138 \begin_inset space ~
35150 \begin_inset space ~
35155 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35159 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35166 \begin_layout Standard
35171 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35175 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35176 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35177 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35178 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35179 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35182 \begin_layout Standard
35183 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35184 \begin_inset space ~
35188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35190 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35197 \begin_layout Subsection
35201 \begin_layout Standard
35205 \begin_inset space ~
35209 \begin_inset space ~
35213 \begin_inset space ~
35217 \begin_inset space ~
35221 \begin_inset space ~
35225 \begin_inset space ~
35230 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35233 \begin_inset space ~
35237 \begin_inset space ~
35241 \begin_inset space ~
35245 \begin_inset space ~
35249 \begin_inset space ~
35253 \begin_inset space ~
35258 will split it horizontally.
35259 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35260 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35261 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35262 three or more documents at the same time.
35263 To close a split view, use the menu
35266 \begin_inset space ~
35270 \begin_inset space ~
35278 \begin_layout Subsection
35282 \begin_layout Standard
35283 Closes a split view.
35286 \begin_layout Subsection
35290 \begin_layout Standard
35291 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35292 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35293 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35294 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35295 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35298 \begin_layout Section
35300 \begin_inset Index idx
35303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35312 \begin_layout Subsection
35316 \begin_layout Standard
35317 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35318 \begin_inset space ~
35322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35324 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35335 \begin_layout Subsection
35337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35339 name "sub:Special-Character"
35346 \begin_layout Standard
35347 Here you can insert the following characters:
35350 \begin_layout Description
35355 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35357 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35358 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35359 You can get a complete display by checking
35362 \begin_inset space ~
35368 \begin_inset Newline newline
35372 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35380 Not all characters will be visible in the
35384 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35392 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35396 ) can display every character.
35404 \begin_layout Description
35405 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35409 \begin_layout Description
35411 \begin_inset space ~
35415 \begin_inset space ~
35418 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35419 \begin_inset space ~
35423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35425 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35432 \begin_layout Description
35434 \begin_inset space ~
35437 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35440 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35441 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35447 \begin_layout Description
35449 \begin_inset space ~
35452 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35455 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35456 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35462 \begin_layout Description
35464 \begin_inset space ~
35467 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35471 \begin_layout Description
35473 \begin_inset space ~
35476 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35480 \begin_layout Description
35482 \begin_inset space ~
35485 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35491 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35497 \begin_layout Description
35499 \begin_inset space ~
35502 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35506 \begin_layout Description
35508 \begin_inset space ~
35512 \begin_inset Index idx
35515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35522 \begin_inset Index idx
35525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35526 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35531 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35532 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35534 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35539 \begin_inset Index idx
35542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35543 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35549 \begin_inset Newline newline
35552 More information about this feature can be found in the
35558 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35564 \begin_layout Subsection
35568 \begin_layout Standard
35569 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35572 \begin_layout Description
35573 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35574 \begin_inset script superscript
35576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35585 \begin_layout Description
35586 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35587 \begin_inset script subscript
35589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35598 \begin_layout Description
35600 \begin_inset space ~
35603 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35604 \begin_inset space ~
35608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35610 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35617 \begin_layout Description
35619 \begin_inset space ~
35622 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35623 \begin_inset space ~
35627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35629 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35636 \begin_layout Description
35638 \begin_inset space ~
35641 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35642 \begin_inset space ~
35646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35648 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35655 \begin_layout Description
35657 \begin_inset space ~
35660 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35666 \begin_inset space \space{}
35669 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35670 An example from the LyX
35675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35678 To insert a fraction use the command
35683 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35687 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35696 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35703 \begin_layout Description
35705 \begin_inset space ~
35708 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35709 \begin_inset space ~
35713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35715 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35722 \begin_layout Description
35724 \begin_inset space ~
35727 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35728 \begin_inset space ~
35732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35734 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35741 \begin_layout Description
35743 \begin_inset space ~
35746 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35747 \begin_inset space ~
35751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35753 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35760 \begin_layout Description
35761 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35762 \begin_inset space ~
35766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35768 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35775 \begin_layout Description
35777 \begin_inset space ~
35780 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35781 \begin_inset space ~
35785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35787 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35794 \begin_layout Description
35796 \begin_inset space ~
35799 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35800 \begin_inset space ~
35804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35806 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35813 \begin_layout Description
35815 \begin_inset space ~
35819 \begin_inset space ~
35822 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35823 \begin_inset space ~
35827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35829 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35836 \begin_layout Description
35838 \begin_inset space ~
35841 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35842 as described in section
35843 \begin_inset space ~
35847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35849 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35856 \begin_layout Description
35858 \begin_inset space ~
35861 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35862 \begin_inset space ~
35866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35868 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35875 \begin_layout Description
35877 \begin_inset space ~
35880 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35881 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35883 \begin_inset space ~
35887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35889 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35896 \begin_layout Description
35898 \begin_inset space ~
35901 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35902 \begin_inset space ~
35906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35908 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35915 \begin_layout Description
35917 \begin_inset space ~
35921 \begin_inset space ~
35924 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35925 \begin_inset space ~
35929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35931 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35938 \begin_layout Subsection
35942 \begin_layout Standard
35943 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35947 \begin_inset space ~
35968 are described in section
35969 \begin_inset space ~
35973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35975 reference "sec:toc"
35984 is described in section
35985 \begin_inset space ~
35989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35991 reference "sec:Index"
35999 is described in section
36000 \begin_inset space ~
36004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36006 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36012 BibTeX Bibliography
36014 is described in section
36015 \begin_inset space ~
36019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36021 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36028 \begin_layout Subsection
36032 \begin_layout Standard
36033 To insert floats, as described in section
36034 \begin_inset space ~
36038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36040 reference "sec:Floats"
36044 and in detail the chapter
36051 \begin_inset space ~
36059 \begin_layout Subsection
36063 \begin_layout Standard
36064 To insert notes, described in section
36065 \begin_inset space ~
36069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36071 reference "sec:Notes"
36078 \begin_layout Subsection
36082 \begin_layout Standard
36083 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36085 Branches are described in section
36086 \begin_inset space ~
36090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36092 reference "sec:Branches"
36099 \begin_layout Subsection
36103 \begin_layout Standard
36104 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36105 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36107 An example is the document class
36108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36115 with three custom insets.
36118 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36122 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36128 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36131 \begin_layout Subsection
36133 \begin_inset Index idx
36136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36145 \begin_layout Standard
36146 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36148 For more information see chapter
36150 External Document Parts
36153 \begin_inset space ~
36159 \begin_layout Subsection
36161 \begin_inset Index idx
36164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36173 \begin_layout Standard
36174 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36175 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36182 \begin_inset space ~
36190 \begin_layout Subsection
36194 \begin_layout Standard
36199 dialog as described in section
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36206 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36213 \begin_layout Subsection
36217 \begin_layout Standard
36222 as described in section
36223 \begin_inset space ~
36227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36229 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36236 \begin_layout Subsection
36240 \begin_layout Standard
36245 as described in section
36246 \begin_inset space ~
36250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36252 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36259 \begin_layout Subsection
36261 \begin_inset Index idx
36264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36271 \begin_inset Index idx
36274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36275 Longtables ! Caption
36283 \begin_layout Standard
36284 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36285 Floats are described in section
36286 \begin_inset space ~
36290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36292 reference "sec:Floats"
36296 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36303 \begin_inset space ~
36311 \begin_layout Subsection
36315 \begin_layout Standard
36316 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36317 \begin_inset space ~
36321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36323 reference "sec:Index"
36330 \begin_layout Subsection
36334 \begin_layout Standard
36335 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36336 \begin_inset space ~
36340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36342 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36349 \begin_layout Subsection
36353 \begin_layout Standard
36354 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36355 Tables are described in section
36356 \begin_inset space ~
36360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36362 reference "sec:Tables"
36366 and in detail in the chapter
36373 \begin_inset space ~
36381 \begin_layout Subsection
36385 \begin_layout Standard
36391 Graphics are described in section
36392 \begin_inset space ~
36396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36398 reference "sec:Graphics"
36405 \begin_layout Subsection
36409 \begin_layout Standard
36410 Inserts a URL as described in section
36411 \begin_inset space ~
36415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36417 reference "sub:URLs"
36424 \begin_layout Subsection
36428 \begin_layout Standard
36429 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36436 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36443 \begin_layout Subsection
36447 \begin_layout Standard
36448 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36449 \begin_inset space ~
36453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36455 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36462 \begin_layout Subsection
36466 \begin_layout Standard
36467 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36468 \begin_inset space ~
36472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36474 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36481 \begin_layout Subsection
36485 \begin_layout Standard
36486 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36487 title or caption of a float.
36488 Inserts a short title as described in section
36489 \begin_inset space ~
36493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36495 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36502 \begin_layout Subsection
36506 \begin_layout Standard
36507 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36508 \begin_inset space ~
36512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36514 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36521 \begin_layout Subsection
36523 \begin_inset Index idx
36526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36535 \begin_layout Standard
36536 Inserts a program listings box.
36537 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36539 Program Code Listings
36544 \begin_inset space ~
36552 \begin_layout Subsection
36556 \begin_layout Standard
36557 Inserts the actual date.
36558 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36560 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36568 \begin_inset space ~
36576 \begin_layout Subsection
36580 \begin_layout Standard
36581 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36582 \begin_inset space ~
36586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36588 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36595 \begin_layout Section
36597 \begin_inset Index idx
36600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36609 \begin_layout Standard
36610 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36611 \begin_inset space ~
36614 of the current document.
36615 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36618 \begin_layout Subsection
36622 \begin_layout Standard
36623 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36624 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36625 to jump, for example, between section
36626 \begin_inset space ~
36630 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36631 \begin_inset space ~
36634 2.5 and use the submenu
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36641 \begin_inset space ~
36648 \begin_inset space ~
36654 \begin_inset space ~
36658 \begin_inset space ~
36664 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36668 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36674 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36677 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36680 \begin_layout Standard
36681 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36685 \begin_inset space ~
36690 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36693 \begin_inset space ~
36698 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36701 \begin_layout Subsection
36702 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36705 \begin_layout Standard
36706 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36710 \begin_layout Subsection
36714 \begin_layout Standard
36715 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36716 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36717 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36721 \begin_inset space ~
36725 \begin_inset space ~
36733 \begin_layout Subsection
36737 \begin_layout Standard
36738 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36741 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36743 \begin_inset space ~
36751 \begin_inset space ~
36756 manual for a detailed description.
36759 \begin_layout Section
36761 \begin_inset Index idx
36764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36773 \begin_layout Subsection
36777 \begin_layout Standard
36778 Change Tracking is described in section
36779 \begin_inset space ~
36783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36785 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36792 \begin_layout Subsection
36797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36807 \begin_layout Standard
36808 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36810 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
36811 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36812 to the clipboard or update the view.
36813 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36816 \begin_layout Subsection
36817 Start Appendix Here
36820 \begin_layout Standard
36821 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36822 as described in section
36823 \begin_inset space ~
36827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36829 reference "sec:Appendices"
36836 \begin_layout Subsection
36838 \begin_inset space ~
36844 \begin_layout Standard
36845 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36846 default output format for the document (menu
36848 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36849 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36850 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36856 \begin_inset space ~
36862 \begin_inset space ~
36866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36868 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36872 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
36874 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36875 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36877 \begin_inset space ~
36880 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36882 \begin_inset space ~
36885 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36887 \begin_inset space ~
36891 \begin_inset space ~
36897 \begin_inset space ~
36901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36903 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36907 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36908 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36910 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36911 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36913 \begin_inset space ~
36916 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36918 \begin_inset space ~
36921 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36925 \begin_inset space ~
36929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36931 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36936 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
36937 The default output format is
36940 \begin_inset space ~
36948 \begin_layout Subsection
36949 View (Other Formats)
36952 \begin_layout Standard
36953 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36954 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36955 actual document with an external program.
36956 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
36957 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
36958 All possible formats are listed in section
36959 \begin_inset space ~
36963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36965 reference "sub:Export"
36970 You should at least see the menu entry
36975 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
36976 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
36977 \begin_inset space ~
36981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36983 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36988 \begin_inset Index idx
36991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36992 Reconfiguration of LyX
37000 \begin_layout Standard
37001 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37002 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37004 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37005 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37007 \begin_inset space ~
37010 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37012 \begin_inset space ~
37015 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37019 \begin_inset space ~
37023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37025 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37030 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37033 \begin_layout Subsection
37035 \begin_inset space ~
37041 \begin_layout Standard
37042 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37043 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37046 \begin_layout Subsection
37047 Update (Other Formats)
37050 \begin_layout Standard
37051 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37052 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37055 \begin_layout Subsection
37056 View Master Document
37059 \begin_layout Standard
37060 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37076 \begin_inset space ~
37081 manual for more information on this topic).
37082 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37083 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37087 \begin_inset space ~
37091 \begin_inset space ~
37096 generates the output of the whole book, while
37100 will just output the chapter alone.
37103 \begin_layout Standard
37104 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37105 in the document settings (menu
37107 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37108 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37109 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37111 \begin_inset space ~
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37127 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37131 ) or in the preferences (menu
37133 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37134 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37136 \begin_inset space ~
37139 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37141 \begin_inset space ~
37144 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37146 \begin_inset space ~
37150 \begin_inset space ~
37156 \begin_inset space ~
37160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37162 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37169 \begin_layout Subsection
37170 Update Master Document
37173 \begin_layout Standard
37174 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37190 \begin_inset space ~
37195 manual for more information on this topic).
37196 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37197 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37200 \begin_layout Standard
37201 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37202 in the document settings (menu
37204 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37205 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37206 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37208 \begin_inset space ~
37212 \begin_inset space ~
37218 \begin_inset space ~
37222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37224 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37228 ) or in the preferences (menu
37230 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37231 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37233 \begin_inset space ~
37236 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37238 \begin_inset space ~
37241 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37243 \begin_inset space ~
37247 \begin_inset space ~
37253 \begin_inset space ~
37257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37259 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37266 \begin_layout Subsection
37270 \begin_layout Standard
37271 Un/compresses the current document.
37274 \begin_layout Subsection
37278 \begin_layout Standard
37279 The document settings are described in appendix
37280 \begin_inset space ~
37284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37286 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37293 \begin_layout Section
37295 \begin_inset Index idx
37298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37307 \begin_layout Subsection
37311 \begin_layout Standard
37312 Spell checking is explained in section
37313 \begin_inset space ~
37317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37319 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37326 \begin_layout Subsection
37330 \begin_layout Standard
37331 The thesaurus is described in section
37332 \begin_inset space ~
37336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37338 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37345 \begin_layout Subsection
37347 \begin_inset Index idx
37350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37357 \begin_inset Index idx
37360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37369 \begin_layout Standard
37370 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37371 the highlighted document part.
37374 \begin_layout Subsection
37379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37387 \begin_inset Index idx
37390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37399 \begin_layout Standard
37400 Generates with the help of the program
37404 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37405 This feature is not available on Windows.
37408 \begin_layout Subsection
37413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37421 \begin_inset Index idx
37424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37433 \begin_layout Standard
37434 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37439 \begin_inset space ~
37444 to see the full filename paths.
37447 \begin_layout Subsection
37449 \begin_inset Index idx
37452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37461 \begin_layout Standard
37462 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37463 \begin_inset space ~
37467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37469 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37476 \begin_layout Subsection
37478 \begin_inset Index idx
37481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37482 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37493 Reconfiguration of LyX
37497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37510 \begin_inset Index idx
37513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37514 Reconfiguration of LyX
37522 \begin_layout Standard
37523 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37524 needs; see also section
37525 \begin_inset space ~
37529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37531 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37538 \begin_layout Subsection
37542 \begin_layout Standard
37547 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37548 \begin_inset space ~
37552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37554 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37561 \begin_layout Section
37563 \begin_inset Index idx
37566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37575 \begin_layout Standard
37576 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37578 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37582 \begin_layout Standard
37586 \begin_inset space ~
37591 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37592 found by LyX (see also section
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37599 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37606 \begin_layout Standard
37610 \begin_inset space ~
37617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37626 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37630 \begin_layout Section
37632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37634 name "sec:Toolbars"
37641 \begin_layout Standard
37642 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37643 \begin_inset space ~
37647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37649 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37656 \begin_layout Standard
37657 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37658 This is described in the
37660 Additional Features
37665 \begin_layout Subsection
37667 \begin_inset Index idx
37670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37679 \begin_layout Standard
37680 \begin_inset Graphics
37681 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37689 \begin_layout Standard
37690 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37696 \begin_layout Standard
37697 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37714 \begin_inset Note Note
37717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37718 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37723 manual for more information.
37731 \begin_layout Standard
37732 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37738 \begin_layout Standard
37739 \begin_inset Tabular
37740 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37741 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37742 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37743 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37749 \begin_inset Graphics
37750 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37764 pull-down box for the environments
37777 \begin_layout Standard
37778 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37784 \begin_layout Standard
37786 \begin_inset Tabular
37787 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37788 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37789 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37790 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37814 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37844 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37874 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37890 arg "dialog-show print"
37898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37904 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37920 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37934 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37964 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37994 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38024 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38054 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38084 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38100 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38114 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38140 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38154 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38173 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38182 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38196 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38197 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38225 Emphasize text, function of the
38227 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38229 \begin_inset space ~
38232 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38241 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38262 Set text to noun style, function of the
38264 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38266 \begin_inset space ~
38269 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38287 arg "textstyle-apply"
38295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38299 Format text using the current settings in the
38301 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38303 \begin_inset space ~
38306 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38315 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38338 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38339 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38341 \begin_inset space ~
38350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38359 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38373 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38387 arg "tabular-insert"
38395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38401 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38408 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38417 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38429 Toggle outline window on/off,
38431 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38438 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38447 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38459 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38465 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38474 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38486 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38499 \begin_layout Subsection
38501 \begin_inset Index idx
38504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38513 \begin_layout Standard
38514 \begin_inset Graphics
38515 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38523 \begin_layout Standard
38524 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38530 \begin_layout Standard
38531 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38535 \begin_layout Standard
38536 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38542 \begin_layout Standard
38543 \begin_inset Tabular
38544 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38545 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38546 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38547 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38584 arg "layout Enumerate"
38592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38611 arg "layout Itemize"
38619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38629 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38665 arg "layout Description"
38673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38692 arg "depth-increment"
38700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38706 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38708 \begin_inset space ~
38712 \begin_inset space ~
38721 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38730 arg "depth-decrement"
38738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38744 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38746 \begin_inset space ~
38750 \begin_inset space ~
38759 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38768 arg "float-insert figure"
38776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38782 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38783 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38799 arg "float-insert table"
38807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38813 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38814 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38844 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38860 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38874 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38890 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38904 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38934 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38936 \begin_inset space ~
38945 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38954 arg "nomencl-insert"
38962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38968 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38970 \begin_inset space ~
38979 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38988 arg "footnote-insert"
38996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39002 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39018 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39032 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39034 \begin_inset space ~
39043 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39066 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39067 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39098 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39112 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39142 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39172 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39189 \begin_inset space ~
39198 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39207 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39221 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39222 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39238 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39252 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39253 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39255 \begin_inset space ~
39264 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39273 arg "dialog-show character"
39281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39287 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39289 \begin_inset space ~
39292 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39299 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39308 arg "layout-paragraph"
39316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39322 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39342 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39370 \begin_layout Subsection
39371 View/Update Toolbar
39372 \begin_inset Index idx
39375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39376 Toolbar ! View / Update
39384 \begin_layout Standard
39385 \begin_inset Graphics
39386 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39393 \begin_layout Standard
39394 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39400 \begin_layout Standard
39401 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39405 \begin_layout Standard
39406 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39412 \begin_layout Standard
39413 \begin_inset Tabular
39414 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39415 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39416 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39417 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39441 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39457 arg "buffer-update"
39465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39471 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39487 arg "master-buffer-view"
39495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39501 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39503 \begin_inset space ~
39512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39521 arg "master-buffer-update"
39529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39535 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39537 \begin_inset space ~
39541 \begin_inset space ~
39550 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39559 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39573 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39574 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39575 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39576 Synchronize with Output
39582 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39587 \begin_inset Graphics
39588 filename ../images/view-others.png
39590 groupId toolbarbuttons
39601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39607 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39608 View (Other Formats)
39614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39619 \begin_inset Graphics
39620 filename ../images/update-others.png
39622 groupId toolbarbuttons
39631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39637 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39638 Update (Other Formats)
39651 \begin_layout Standard
39652 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39656 \begin_layout Subsection
39660 \begin_layout Standard
39661 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39668 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39672 , the table toolbar
39673 \begin_inset Index idx
39676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39685 \begin_inset space ~
39690 manual and the math macro toolbar
39691 \begin_inset Index idx
39694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39707 \begin_layout Chapter
39708 The Document Settings
39709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39711 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39716 \begin_inset Index idx
39719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39720 Document ! Settings
39728 \begin_layout Standard
39732 \begin_inset space ~
39737 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39738 is called with the menu
39740 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39744 You can save your document settings as default with the
39746 Save as Document Defaults
39748 button in any dialog.
39749 This will create a template named
39753 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
39757 \begin_layout Standard
39762 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39763 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39766 \begin_layout Standard
39767 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39768 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39769 to find the one you are looking for.
39770 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39771 the submenus of the dialog.
39773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39777 \begin_inset space \space{}
39781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39788 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39789 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39790 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39793 \begin_layout Section
39797 \begin_layout Standard
39798 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39800 Document classes are described in section
39801 \begin_inset space ~
39805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39807 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39815 \begin_layout Standard
39819 \begin_inset space ~
39824 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
39828 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
39829 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39831 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39840 \begin_layout Standard
39841 Some classes use special class options by default.
39842 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39846 and you can decide to use them or not.
39847 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39848 recommended you leave them untouched.
39853 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39858 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
39859 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39865 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39866 \begin_inset Newline newline
39871 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39874 \begin_inset Newline newline
39877 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
39883 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39885 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39897 \begin_layout Standard
39902 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39903 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
39904 document is opened without its master.
39905 This way child documents are always compilable.
39906 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39913 \begin_inset space ~
39921 \begin_layout Standard
39922 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
39932 \begin_inset Index idx
39935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39936 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
39942 \begin_inset Index idx
39945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39946 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
39951 for cross-references, see section
39952 \begin_inset space ~
39956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39958 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39965 \begin_layout Section
39969 \begin_layout Standard
39970 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39971 Please refer to the section
39974 \begin_inset space ~
39982 \begin_inset space ~
39987 manual for details.
39990 \begin_layout Section
39994 \begin_layout Standard
39995 Modules are explained in section
39996 \begin_inset space ~
40000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40002 reference "sub:Modules"
40009 \begin_layout Section
40013 \begin_layout Standard
40015 \begin_inset space ~
40019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40021 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40028 \begin_layout Section
40032 \begin_layout Standard
40033 The document font settings are described in section
40034 \begin_inset space ~
40038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40040 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40047 \begin_layout Section
40051 \begin_layout Standard
40052 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40064 \begin_inset space ~
40069 and whether it should be a
40072 \begin_inset space ~
40077 can also be specified here.
40080 \begin_layout Standard
40081 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40083 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40085 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40088 \begin_layout Section
40092 \begin_layout Standard
40093 This dialog is described in sections
40094 \begin_inset space ~
40098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40100 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40107 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40114 \begin_layout Section
40118 \begin_layout Standard
40119 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40120 \begin_inset space ~
40124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40126 reference "sub:Margins"
40133 \begin_layout Section
40135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40137 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40142 \begin_inset Index idx
40145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40146 Language ! Encoding
40154 \begin_layout Standard
40155 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40156 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40157 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40158 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40159 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40160 known for a particular character).
40164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40165 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40170 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40175 manual for details.
40183 \begin_layout Standard
40184 If you use the option
40188 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40189 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40190 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40191 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40192 exactly one encoding.
40193 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40196 \begin_layout Standard
40197 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40198 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40199 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40200 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40201 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40202 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40207 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40208 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40209 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40210 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40211 engines to standard LaTeX.
40212 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40213 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40216 \begin_inset space ~
40223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40235 \begin_inset space ~
40242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40254 \begin_inset space ~
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40266 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40271 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40275 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40278 \begin_layout Standard
40282 \begin_inset space ~
40287 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40297 The possible settings are:
40300 \begin_layout Description
40301 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40303 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40304 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40308 \begin_inset space ~
40312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40314 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40321 \begin_layout Description
40322 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40323 format you will use.
40324 In many cases this will be
40329 \begin_inset Index idx
40332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40333 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40339 If the newer package
40344 \begin_inset Index idx
40347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40348 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40353 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40354 this package will be used instead of
40361 \begin_layout Description
40363 \begin_inset space ~
40374 would be more appropriate.
40377 \begin_layout Description
40378 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40379 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40383 (for German texts), type in
40386 \begin_inset Newline newline
40391 usepackage{ngerman}
40394 \begin_layout Description
40395 None will not use a language package.
40396 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40399 \begin_layout Standard
40400 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40403 \begin_layout Description
40405 \begin_inset space ~
40409 \begin_inset space ~
40413 \begin_inset space ~
40420 , but the LaTeX-package
40425 \begin_inset Index idx
40428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40429 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40435 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40436 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40437 languages in TeX code.
40440 \begin_layout Description
40441 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40442 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40443 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40446 \begin_layout Description
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40452 \begin_inset space ~
40455 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40458 \begin_layout Description
40460 \begin_inset space ~
40464 \begin_inset space ~
40467 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40470 \begin_layout Description
40472 \begin_inset space ~
40475 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40478 \begin_layout Description
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40484 \begin_inset space ~
40487 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40488 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40491 \begin_layout Description
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40497 \begin_inset space ~
40500 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40504 \begin_layout Description
40506 \begin_inset space ~
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40513 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40514 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40517 \begin_layout Description
40519 \begin_inset space ~
40523 \begin_inset space ~
40527 \begin_inset space ~
40530 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40531 \begin_inset space ~
40537 \begin_layout Description
40539 \begin_inset space ~
40543 \begin_inset space ~
40547 \begin_inset space ~
40550 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40551 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40554 \begin_layout Description
40556 \begin_inset space ~
40560 \begin_inset space ~
40563 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40564 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40565 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40566 \begin_inset space ~
40570 \begin_inset space ~
40576 \begin_layout Description
40578 \begin_inset space ~
40582 \begin_inset space ~
40585 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40586 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40587 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40588 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40589 \begin_inset space ~
40593 \begin_inset space ~
40599 \begin_layout Description
40601 \begin_inset space ~
40605 \begin_inset space ~
40608 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40611 \begin_layout Description
40613 \begin_inset space ~
40617 \begin_inset space ~
40620 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40623 \begin_layout Description
40625 \begin_inset space ~
40629 \begin_inset space ~
40632 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40635 \begin_layout Description
40637 \begin_inset space ~
40640 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40643 \begin_layout Description
40645 \begin_inset space ~
40648 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40651 \begin_layout Description
40653 \begin_inset space ~
40657 \begin_inset space ~
40660 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40663 \begin_layout Description
40665 \begin_inset space ~
40669 \begin_inset space ~
40675 \begin_layout Description
40677 \begin_inset space ~
40681 \begin_inset space ~
40684 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40687 \begin_layout Description
40689 \begin_inset space ~
40693 \begin_inset space ~
40699 \begin_layout Description
40701 \begin_inset space ~
40705 \begin_inset space ~
40708 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40713 \begin_inset Index idx
40716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40717 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40722 , when using this, set the document language to
40727 \begin_layout Description
40729 \begin_inset space ~
40733 \begin_inset space ~
40736 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40740 , when using this, set the document language to
40743 \begin_inset space ~
40749 \begin_layout Description
40751 \begin_inset space ~
40755 \begin_inset space ~
40758 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40763 \begin_inset Index idx
40766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40767 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
40772 , when using this, set the document language to
40777 \begin_layout Description
40779 \begin_inset space ~
40783 \begin_inset space ~
40786 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40790 , when using this, set the document language to
40795 \begin_layout Description
40797 \begin_inset space ~
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40804 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40808 , when using this, set the document language to
40813 \begin_layout Description
40815 \begin_inset space ~
40818 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40821 \begin_layout Description
40823 \begin_inset space ~
40827 \begin_inset space ~
40831 \begin_inset space ~
40834 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40837 \begin_layout Description
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40847 \begin_inset space ~
40850 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40851 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40852 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40855 \begin_layout Description
40857 \begin_inset space ~
40861 \begin_inset space ~
40867 \begin_layout Description
40869 \begin_inset space ~
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40876 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40877 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40880 \begin_layout Description
40882 \begin_inset space ~
40886 \begin_inset space ~
40889 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
40894 \begin_inset Index idx
40897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40898 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40903 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40906 \begin_layout Description
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40915 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40923 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
40928 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
40930 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40933 \begin_layout Description
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40939 \begin_inset space ~
40942 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40947 \begin_inset Index idx
40950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40951 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
40956 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40959 \begin_layout Description
40961 \begin_inset space ~
40964 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40969 \begin_inset Index idx
40972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40973 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40979 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
40983 \begin_layout Description
40985 \begin_inset space ~
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40993 \begin_inset space ~
40996 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
40997 \begin_inset space ~
41003 \begin_layout Description
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41013 \begin_inset space ~
41016 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41017 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41018 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41022 \begin_layout Description
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41035 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41036 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41039 \begin_layout Section
41041 \begin_inset Index idx
41044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41051 \begin_inset Index idx
41054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41061 \begin_inset Index idx
41064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41065 Color ! Shaded boxes
41071 \begin_inset Index idx
41074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41075 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41083 \begin_layout Standard
41084 Here you can alter the font color for the
41088 (default: black), for
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41096 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41100 (default: white) and for
41103 \begin_inset space ~
41113 sets the color back to the default.
41116 \begin_layout Standard
41117 Clicking any button showing
41125 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41126 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41127 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41128 later more quickly.
41131 \begin_layout Standard
41132 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41136 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41141 out note appears blue in the output.)
41149 \begin_layout Standard
41150 Note, if you change the
41153 \begin_inset space ~
41158 font color and use the option
41161 \begin_inset space ~
41166 in the document settings under
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41174 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41175 \begin_inset space ~
41179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41181 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41188 \begin_layout Standard
41189 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41195 \begin_layout Standard
41199 \begin_inset space ~
41208 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41210 \begin_inset space ~
41213 Code after a forced page break:
41216 \begin_layout Itemize
41217 For the page color:
41218 \begin_inset Newline newline
41225 pagecolor{color name}
41228 \begin_layout Itemize
41229 For the text color:
41230 \begin_inset Newline newline
41240 \begin_layout Standard
41241 You are restricted to one of
41277 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41284 \begin_inset space ~
41290 \begin_inset Newline newline
41293 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41294 names to refer to them:
41297 \begin_layout Itemize
41303 \begin_inset Newline newline
41308 page_backgroundcolor
41311 \begin_layout Itemize
41315 \begin_inset space ~
41321 \begin_inset Newline newline
41329 \begin_layout Itemize
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41339 \begin_inset Newline newline
41347 \begin_layout Itemize
41351 \begin_inset space ~
41357 \begin_inset Newline newline
41365 \begin_layout Standard
41366 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41370 Cells of the Embedded
41371 \begin_inset space ~
41377 \begin_layout Section
41381 \begin_layout Standard
41382 Here you can adjust the
41386 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41390 as described in section
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41397 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41404 \begin_layout Section
41408 \begin_layout Standard
41409 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41414 \begin_inset Index idx
41417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41418 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41428 \begin_inset Index idx
41431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41432 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41440 Sectioned bibliography
41442 using the LaTeX package
41447 \begin_inset Index idx
41450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41451 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41456 and you can select a
41460 for the generation of the bibliography.
41461 For a further description see section
41462 \begin_inset space ~
41466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41468 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41475 \begin_layout Section
41479 \begin_layout Standard
41480 Here you can define the
41484 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41486 \begin_inset space ~
41490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41492 reference "sec:Index"
41499 \begin_layout Section
41503 \begin_layout Standard
41504 The PDF properties are explained in section
41505 \begin_inset space ~
41509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41511 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41518 \begin_layout Section
41522 \begin_layout Standard
41523 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41528 \begin_inset Index idx
41531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41532 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41542 \begin_inset Index idx
41545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41546 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41556 \begin_inset Index idx
41559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41560 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41570 \begin_inset Index idx
41573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41574 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41579 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41582 \begin_layout Description
41583 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41584 ensure that you have enabled
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41595 \begin_layout Description
41596 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41599 \begin_inset space ~
41611 \begin_layout Description
41612 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41623 \begin_layout Description
41624 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41626 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41635 \begin_layout Section
41639 \begin_layout Standard
41640 The float placement options are described in the section
41643 \begin_inset space ~
41651 \begin_inset space ~
41659 \begin_layout Section
41663 \begin_layout Standard
41664 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41666 Program Code Listings
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41679 \begin_layout Section
41683 \begin_layout Standard
41684 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41692 set to be used and set the
41697 The itemize environment is described in section
41698 \begin_inset space ~
41702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41704 reference "sec:Itemize"
41711 \begin_layout Standard
41712 You can furthermore specify a
41715 \begin_inset space ~
41720 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41721 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41728 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41734 \begin_inset space \space{}
41738 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41748 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41749 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41752 \begin_layout Standard
41753 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41761 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
41764 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41765 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41767 \begin_inset space ~
41773 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41777 usepackage{textcomp}
41780 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41784 usepackage{amssymb}
41794 \begin_layout Section
41798 \begin_layout Standard
41799 Branches are described in section
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41806 reference "sec:Branches"
41813 \begin_layout Section
41815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41817 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41824 \begin_layout Standard
41825 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41828 \begin_layout Description
41830 \begin_inset space ~
41834 \begin_inset space ~
41837 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41857 View Master Document
41858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41865 Update Master Document
41866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41873 menu or the toolbar.
41874 The default is set in
41876 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41877 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41879 \begin_inset space ~
41882 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41886 \begin_inset space ~
41890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41892 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41899 \begin_layout Description
41901 \begin_inset space ~
41905 \begin_inset space ~
41908 Output settings for the menu
41910 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41912 \begin_inset space ~
41918 For a detailed description see section
41920 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41925 \begin_inset space ~
41933 \begin_layout Description
41935 \begin_inset space ~
41939 \begin_inset space ~
41942 Options offers settings for the export format
41948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41961 \begin_inset space ~
41966 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41967 \begin_inset space ~
41970 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41974 \begin_inset space ~
41979 settings are described in detail in section
41981 Math Output in XHTML
41986 \begin_inset space ~
41995 \begin_inset space ~
41999 \begin_inset space ~
42004 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42007 \begin_layout Section
42012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42022 \begin_layout Standard
42023 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42024 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42025 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42026 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42030 \begin_layout Standard
42031 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42032 \begin_inset space ~
42036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42038 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42045 \begin_layout Chapter
42051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42053 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42058 \begin_inset Index idx
42061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42070 \begin_layout Standard
42071 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42073 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42077 It has the following submenus.
42080 \begin_layout Section
42084 \begin_layout Subsection
42088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42089 User Interface File
42090 \begin_inset Index idx
42093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42094 Customization ! of toolbars
42100 \begin_inset Index idx
42103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42104 Customization ! of menus
42112 \begin_layout Standard
42113 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42114 interface (ui) file.
42115 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42123 \begin_layout Description
42128 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42131 \begin_layout Description
42138 the menu entries in popup context menus
42141 \begin_layout Description
42146 specifies the toolbar buttons
42149 \begin_layout Standard
42150 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42151 and edit the entries.
42154 \begin_layout Standard
42155 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42167 entries must be finished with an explicit
42192 and in the case of the
42193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42205 The syntax for the entries is:
42208 \begin_layout Standard
42209 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42237 \begin_layout Standard
42239 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42242 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42244 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42257 \begin_inset space ~
42265 \begin_layout Standard
42266 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42272 \begin_layout Standard
42273 For example, assuming you use the menu
42275 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42278 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42282 \begin_layout Standard
42283 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42307 \begin_layout Standard
42309 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42324 to have the sixth bookmark.
42327 \begin_layout Standard
42331 \begin_inset space ~
42336 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42337 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42338 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42341 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42348 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42352 \begin_layout Standard
42355 Enable tool tips in main work area
42357 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42361 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42365 \begin_layout Standard
42368 Restore window layouts and geometries
42370 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42371 in the last LyX session.
42374 \begin_layout Standard
42377 Restore cursor positions
42379 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42383 \begin_layout Standard
42386 Load opened files from last session
42388 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42391 \begin_layout Standard
42394 Clear all session information
42396 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42397 of last opened documents, etc.).
42400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42404 name "sub:Backup documents"
42409 \begin_inset Index idx
42412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42421 \begin_layout Standard
42424 Backup original documents when saving
42426 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42427 it was saved the last time.
42428 It is stored in the
42431 \begin_inset space ~
42437 \begin_inset space ~
42441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42443 reference "sec:Paths"
42447 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42450 \begin_inset space ~
42456 The backup file has the file extension
42457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42471 \begin_layout Standard
42474 Backup documents, every
42476 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42479 \begin_layout Standard
42482 Save documents compressed by default
42484 always saves files in a compressed format.
42487 \begin_layout Standard
42492 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42495 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42497 \begin_inset space ~
42505 \begin_layout Standard
42508 Open documents in tabs
42510 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42513 \begin_layout Standard
42518 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42530 reference "sec:Paths"
42534 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42540 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42542 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42545 \begin_layout Standard
42548 Single close-tab button
42550 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42553 \begin_inset Graphics
42554 filename ../images/closetab.png
42561 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42562 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42565 \begin_layout Standard
42566 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42574 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42582 \begin_layout Subsection
42584 \begin_inset Index idx
42587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42596 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42603 \begin_layout Standard
42604 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42607 \begin_layout Standard
42608 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42616 This section only deals with the fonts
42621 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42624 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42625 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42636 \begin_layout Standard
42637 By default, LyX uses
42653 (depends on the system) as its
42656 \begin_inset space ~
42672 \begin_layout Standard
42673 You can change the font size with the
42680 \begin_layout Standard
42685 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42690 points have the size of 1
42691 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42695 \begin_inset space ~
42699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42701 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42706 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42711 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42712 \begin_inset space ~
42716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42718 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42725 \begin_layout Standard
42728 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42730 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42731 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42732 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42733 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42735 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42736 \begin_inset space ~
42742 \begin_layout Subsection
42744 \begin_inset Index idx
42747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42754 \begin_inset Index idx
42757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42766 \begin_layout Standard
42767 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
42768 the list and selecting the
42775 \begin_layout Standard
42776 By checking the option
42780 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42783 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42784 \begin_inset space ~
42788 \begin_inset space ~
42793 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42796 \begin_layout Subsection
42798 \begin_inset Index idx
42801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42810 \begin_layout Standard
42811 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
42814 \begin_layout Standard
42819 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42820 This feature is described in section
42821 \begin_inset space ~
42825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42827 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42834 \begin_layout Standard
42835 Checking the option
42838 \begin_inset space ~
42842 \begin_inset space ~
42846 \begin_inset space ~
42851 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42854 \begin_layout Section
42856 \begin_inset Index idx
42859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42868 \begin_layout Subsection
42872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42876 \begin_layout Standard
42879 Cursor follows scrollbar
42881 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42885 \begin_layout Standard
42886 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42887 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42888 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42891 \begin_layout Standard
42894 Scroll below end of document
42896 is self-explanatory.
42899 \begin_layout Standard
42900 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
42907 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42909 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42910 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42913 \begin_layout Standard
42916 Sort environments alphabetically
42918 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42921 \begin_layout Standard
42924 Group environments by their category
42926 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42929 \begin_layout Standard
42934 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42945 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42949 \begin_layout Standard
42950 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42955 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42956 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42960 \begin_layout Subsection
42962 \begin_inset Index idx
42965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42972 \begin_inset Index idx
42975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42976 Settings ! Shortcuts
42984 \begin_layout Standard
42989 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
42990 Several binding files are available, among them:
42993 \begin_layout Description
42994 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
42997 \begin_layout Description
42998 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43010 \begin_layout Description
43011 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43022 \begin_layout Standard
43023 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43028 , and binding files for special languages.
43029 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43034 \begin_inset space \space{}
43038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43046 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43050 \begin_layout Standard
43051 Some binding files, like
43055 , only have a limited scope.
43056 When looking at the end of the file
43060 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43063 \begin_layout Standard
43067 \begin_inset space ~
43071 \begin_inset space ~
43076 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43077 in the selected key binding file.
43080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43084 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43089 \begin_inset Index idx
43092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43093 Key Bindings ! Editing
43101 \begin_layout Standard
43102 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43103 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43104 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43107 Show key-bindings containing
43110 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43111 Insert there for example as keyword
43112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43119 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43120 functions that contain
43121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43129 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43130 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43134 that you will find in the
43141 \begin_layout Standard
43142 For example, to add the shortcut
43150 , select the function and press the
43155 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43156 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43159 \begin_layout Standard
43160 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43161 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43162 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43163 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43164 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43169 \begin_layout Standard
43170 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43173 \begin_layout Standard
43174 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43176 The syntax of the entries is:
43179 \begin_layout Standard
43185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43203 \begin_layout Subsection
43205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43207 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43212 \begin_inset Index idx
43215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43222 \begin_inset Index idx
43225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43226 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43234 \begin_layout Standard
43235 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43236 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43237 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43238 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43241 \begin_inset space ~
43245 \begin_inset space ~
43250 and select the keyboard map file named
43257 \begin_layout Standard
43266 keyboard map and, if you use the
43270 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43273 arg "keymap-primary"
43279 arg "keymap-secondary"
43282 respectively or toggle between them with
43285 arg "keymap-toggle"
43291 \begin_layout Standard
43292 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43300 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43309 \begin_layout Standard
43310 You can also specify the mouse
43312 Wheel scrolling speed
43315 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43319 \begin_layout Standard
43327 \begin_inset space ~
43331 \begin_inset space ~
43336 you can select a key for zooming.
43337 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43340 \begin_layout Subsection
43344 \begin_layout Standard
43345 Input completion is described in section
43346 \begin_inset space ~
43350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43352 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43359 \begin_layout Section
43361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43368 \begin_inset Index idx
43371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43378 \begin_inset Index idx
43381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43390 \begin_layout Standard
43391 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43393 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43396 \begin_layout Description
43398 \begin_inset space ~
43401 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43402 It is the default when you
43413 \begin_inset space ~
43421 \begin_layout Description
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43426 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43428 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43430 \begin_inset space ~
43434 \begin_inset space ~
43442 \begin_layout Description
43444 \begin_inset space ~
43447 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43453 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43457 \begin_inset Newline newline
43461 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43473 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43481 \begin_layout Description
43483 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_inset Index idx
43490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43496 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43497 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43498 \begin_inset space ~
43502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43504 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43512 will be used to save the backups.
43513 \begin_inset Newline newline
43516 Backup files have the ending
43517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43527 \begin_layout Description
43532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43540 \begin_inset space ~
43543 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43544 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43545 \begin_inset Newline newline
43552 You add a BibTeX-database
43557 You can edit this file with the program
43566 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43569 \begin_inset space ~
43575 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43580 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43581 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43587 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43588 \begin_inset Newline newline
43591 The pipe is also used for the
43596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43602 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43607 \begin_inset Newline newline
43610 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43611 \begin_inset Newline newline
43627 \begin_layout Description
43629 \begin_inset space ~
43632 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43635 \begin_layout Description
43637 \begin_inset space ~
43640 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43641 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43642 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43645 \begin_layout Description
43647 \begin_inset space ~
43650 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43656 You only need to specify it if you are using
43660 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43666 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43670 \begin_layout Description
43672 \begin_inset space ~
43675 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43676 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43677 where to find it on the system.
43678 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43679 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43688 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43689 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43692 \begin_layout Description
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43697 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43698 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43700 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43702 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43703 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43704 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43705 scanned for the input files.
43706 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43707 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43708 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43709 compilation may fail for some documents.
43712 \begin_layout Section
43716 \begin_layout Standard
43717 Here you can insert your
43726 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43728 \begin_inset space ~
43732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43734 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43738 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43741 \begin_layout Section
43743 \begin_inset Index idx
43746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43747 Language ! Settings
43753 \begin_inset Index idx
43756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43757 Settings ! Language
43765 \begin_layout Subsection
43767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43769 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
43776 \begin_layout Description
43778 \begin_inset space ~
43782 \begin_inset space ~
43785 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
43786 You can find its actual translation status here:
43787 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43789 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43796 \begin_layout Description
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43801 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
43803 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43804 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43821 The most widespread language package is
43826 \begin_inset Index idx
43829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43830 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43835 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
43836 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
43837 alternative language package
43842 \begin_inset Index idx
43845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43846 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43851 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43852 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43858 The available selections are described in section
43859 \begin_inset space ~
43863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43865 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43872 \begin_layout Description
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43877 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
43878 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
43879 An example is the start command
43885 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43890 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43905 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43910 \begin_layout Description
43912 \begin_inset space ~
43920 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43921 command toggles the package on and off.
43924 \begin_layout Description
43926 \begin_inset space ~
43930 \begin_inset space ~
43933 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43937 \begin_layout Description
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43943 \begin_inset space ~
43946 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43947 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43948 used by all LaTeX-packages.
43949 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
43956 \begin_layout Description
43958 \begin_inset space ~
43961 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
43963 When this option is not set, the
43966 \begin_inset space ~
43971 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
43972 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
43975 \begin_inset space ~
43983 \begin_layout Description
43985 \begin_inset space ~
43991 \begin_inset space ~
43997 When it is not set, the
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44005 is set to the end of the document.
44008 \begin_layout Description
44010 \begin_inset space ~
44014 \begin_inset space ~
44017 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44018 language will be underlined in blue.
44021 \begin_layout Description
44023 \begin_inset space ~
44027 \begin_inset space ~
44030 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44031 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44034 \begin_layout Description
44036 \begin_inset space ~
44039 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44040 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44041 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44042 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44045 \begin_layout Subsection
44049 \begin_layout Standard
44050 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44057 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44064 \begin_layout Section
44068 \begin_layout Subsection
44072 \begin_layout Description
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44078 \begin_inset space ~
44081 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44084 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44085 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44087 \begin_inset space ~
44093 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44096 \begin_layout Description
44098 \begin_inset space ~
44102 \begin_inset Index idx
44105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44112 \begin_inset Index idx
44115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44116 Settings ! Date format
44121 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44122 \begin_inset Newline newline
44126 \begin_inset Flex URL
44129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44131 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44137 \begin_inset Newline newline
44140 For example the format
44141 \begin_inset Newline newline
44145 \begin_inset Newline newline
44148 prints the date as day/month/year.
44151 \begin_layout Description
44153 \begin_inset space ~
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44160 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44163 \begin_layout Description
44165 \begin_inset space ~
44168 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44170 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44172 \begin_inset space ~
44178 For a detailed description see section
44180 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44185 \begin_inset space ~
44193 \begin_layout Subsection
44195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44202 \begin_inset Index idx
44205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44212 \begin_inset Index idx
44215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44224 \begin_layout Description
44226 \begin_inset space ~
44229 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44234 The name will be used when the
44239 \begin_inset Newline newline
44243 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44251 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44259 \begin_layout Description
44261 \begin_inset space ~
44264 command is the command LyX
44265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44272 LaTeX uses for printing.
44280 \begin_layout Description
44282 \begin_inset space ~
44286 \begin_inset space ~
44289 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44290 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44291 of the program that provides the
44298 \begin_layout Description
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44304 \begin_inset space ~
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44311 printer This option works only for the
44316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44328 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44329 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44332 \begin_layout Subsection
44337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44347 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44352 \begin_inset Index idx
44355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44364 \begin_layout Description
44366 \begin_inset space ~
44373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44381 \begin_inset space ~
44385 \begin_inset space ~
44388 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44393 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44414 are used for Cyrillic.
44415 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44428 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44429 LyX sets up in the background.
44430 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44433 \begin_layout Description
44435 \begin_inset space ~
44439 \begin_inset space ~
44442 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44447 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44450 \begin_layout Description
44452 \begin_inset space ~
44456 \begin_inset space ~
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44464 \begin_inset space ~
44467 options They only have an effect when the program
44471 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44474 \begin_layout Standard
44475 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44476 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44477 manuals of the applications.
44480 \begin_layout Description
44482 \begin_inset space ~
44485 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44486 \begin_inset space ~
44490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44492 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44499 \begin_layout Description
44501 \begin_inset space ~
44504 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44505 \begin_inset space ~
44509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44511 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44518 \begin_layout Description
44520 \begin_inset space ~
44523 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44524 \begin_inset space ~
44528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44530 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44537 \begin_layout Description
44542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44550 \begin_inset space ~
44553 command Command for the program
44557 that is described in the section
44563 Additional Features
44568 \begin_layout Standard
44569 There are additionally the following options:
44572 \begin_layout Description
44574 \begin_inset space ~
44578 \begin_inset space ~
44582 \begin_inset space ~
44586 \begin_inset space ~
44590 \begin_inset space ~
44593 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44611 to separate folders.
44612 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44613 \begin_inset Index idx
44616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44623 \begin_inset Index idx
44626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44635 \begin_layout Description
44637 \begin_inset space ~
44641 \begin_inset space ~
44645 \begin_inset space ~
44649 \begin_inset space ~
44653 \begin_inset space ~
44657 \begin_inset space ~
44660 changes Removes all manually set
44666 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44667 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44669 \begin_inset space ~
44674 dialog when changing the document class.
44677 \begin_layout Section
44679 \begin_inset space ~
44683 \begin_inset Index idx
44686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44695 \begin_layout Subsection
44697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44699 name "sub:Converters"
44704 \begin_inset Index idx
44707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44716 \begin_layout Standard
44717 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44718 from one format to another.
44719 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44720 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44727 \begin_inset space ~
44732 field and press the
44737 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44741 \begin_inset space ~
44746 drop-down list, modify the
44750 field and press the
44757 \begin_layout Standard
44760 Converter File Cache
44766 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44768 Maximum Age (in days
44771 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44772 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44775 \begin_layout Standard
44776 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44777 definition, is described in the section
44788 \begin_layout Subsection
44790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44792 name "sec:File-Formats"
44797 \begin_inset Index idx
44800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44807 \begin_inset Index idx
44810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44819 \begin_layout Standard
44820 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
44829 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44832 \begin_layout Standard
44833 You can also define the
44835 Default output format
44837 that is used when you use
44839 View, Update, View Master Document
44843 Update Master Document
44849 menu or the toolbar.
44852 \begin_layout Standard
44853 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44864 \begin_layout Standard
44865 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
44866 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44867 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44868 This is done by specifying a
44873 More about this is described in the section
44884 \begin_layout Chapter
44885 Units available in LyX
44886 \begin_inset Index idx
44889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44898 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44905 \begin_layout Standard
44907 \begin_inset space ~
44911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44913 reference "tab:Units"
44917 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
44920 \begin_layout Standard
44921 \begin_inset Float table
44927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44928 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44946 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44954 \begin_inset Tabular
44955 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
44956 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
44957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45109 scaled point (65536
45110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45170 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45225 % of original image width
45232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45439 \begin_layout Chapter
45441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45443 name "chap:Credits"
45450 \begin_layout Standard
45451 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45452 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45455 \begin_layout Itemize
45458 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45461 \begin_layout Itemize
45467 \begin_layout Itemize
45473 \begin_layout Itemize
45479 \begin_layout Itemize
45485 \begin_layout Itemize
45491 \begin_layout Itemize
45497 \begin_layout Itemize
45503 \begin_layout Itemize
45506 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45509 \begin_layout Itemize
45515 \begin_layout Itemize
45521 \begin_layout Itemize
45527 \begin_layout Itemize
45533 \begin_layout Itemize
45539 \begin_layout Itemize
45545 \begin_layout Itemize
45551 \begin_layout Itemize
45557 \begin_layout Itemize
45559 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45568 \begin_layout Standard
45569 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45572 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45579 \begin_layout Bibliography
45580 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45581 LatexCommand bibitem
45588 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45591 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45596 \begin_inset Newline newline
45600 \begin_inset Flex URL
45603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45605 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45613 \begin_layout Bibliography
45614 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45615 LatexCommand bibitem
45616 key "latexcompanion"
45620 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45622 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45625 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45628 \begin_layout Bibliography
45629 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45630 LatexCommand bibitem
45635 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45638 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45641 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45644 \begin_layout Bibliography
45645 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45646 LatexCommand bibitem
45653 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45656 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45659 \begin_layout Bibliography
45660 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45661 LatexCommand bibitem
45673 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45676 \begin_layout Bibliography
45677 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45678 LatexCommand bibitem
45684 \begin_inset Newline newline
45688 \begin_inset Flex URL
45691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45693 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45701 \begin_layout Bibliography
45702 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45703 LatexCommand bibitem
45709 \begin_inset Newline newline
45713 \begin_inset Flex URL
45716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45718 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45726 \begin_layout Bibliography
45727 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45728 LatexCommand bibitem
45734 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45736 name "Documentation"
45737 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45746 \begin_inset Newline newline
45750 \begin_inset Flex URL
45753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45755 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45763 \begin_layout Bibliography
45764 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45765 LatexCommand bibitem
45771 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45773 name "Documentation"
45774 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45778 how to use the program
45783 \begin_inset Newline newline
45787 \begin_inset Flex URL
45790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45792 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45800 \begin_layout Bibliography
45801 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45802 LatexCommand bibitem
45808 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45810 name "Documentation"
45811 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45820 \begin_inset Newline newline
45824 \begin_inset Flex URL
45827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45829 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45837 \begin_layout Bibliography
45838 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45839 LatexCommand bibitem
45845 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45847 name "Documentation"
45848 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45857 \begin_inset Newline newline
45861 \begin_inset Flex URL
45864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45866 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
45874 \begin_layout Bibliography
45875 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45876 LatexCommand bibitem
45882 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45884 name "Documentation"
45885 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
45889 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
45890 \begin_inset Newline newline
45894 \begin_inset Flex URL
45897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45899 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
45907 \begin_layout Bibliography
45908 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45909 LatexCommand bibitem
45915 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45917 name "Documentation"
45918 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
45922 of the LaTeX-package
45927 \begin_inset Index idx
45930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45931 LaTeX-packages ! caption
45937 \begin_inset Newline newline
45941 \begin_inset Flex URL
45944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45946 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
45954 \begin_layout Bibliography
45955 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45956 LatexCommand bibitem
45962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45964 name "Documentation"
45965 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
45969 of the LaTeX-package
45974 \begin_inset Index idx
45977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45978 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
45984 \begin_inset Newline newline
45988 \begin_inset Flex URL
45991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45993 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46001 \begin_layout Bibliography
46002 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46003 LatexCommand bibitem
46009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46011 name "Documentation"
46012 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46016 of the LaTeX-package
46021 \begin_inset Index idx
46024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46025 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46031 \begin_inset Newline newline
46035 \begin_inset Flex URL
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46040 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46048 \begin_layout Bibliography
46049 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46050 LatexCommand bibitem
46056 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46058 name "Documentation"
46059 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46063 of the LaTeX-package
46068 \begin_inset Index idx
46071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46072 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46078 \begin_inset Newline newline
46082 \begin_inset Flex URL
46085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46087 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46095 \begin_layout Bibliography
46096 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46097 LatexCommand bibitem
46103 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46105 name "Documentation"
46106 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46110 of the LaTeX-package
46115 \begin_inset Index idx
46118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46119 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46125 \begin_inset Newline newline
46129 \begin_inset Flex URL
46132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46134 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46142 \begin_layout Bibliography
46143 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46144 LatexCommand bibitem
46150 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46152 name "Documentation"
46153 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46157 of the LaTeX-package
46162 \begin_inset Index idx
46165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46166 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46172 \begin_inset Newline newline
46176 \begin_inset Flex URL
46179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46181 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46189 \begin_layout Bibliography
46190 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46191 LatexCommand bibitem
46197 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46199 name "Documentation"
46200 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46204 of the LaTeX-package
46209 \begin_inset Index idx
46212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46213 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46219 \begin_inset Newline newline
46223 \begin_inset Flex URL
46226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46228 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46236 \begin_layout Bibliography
46237 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46238 LatexCommand bibitem
46244 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46247 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46251 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46252 \begin_inset Newline newline
46256 \begin_inset Flex URL
46259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46261 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46269 \begin_layout Bibliography
46270 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46271 LatexCommand bibitem
46277 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46280 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46284 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46285 \begin_inset Newline newline
46289 \begin_inset Flex URL
46292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46294 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46302 \begin_layout Bibliography
46303 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46304 LatexCommand bibitem
46310 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46313 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46317 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46318 \begin_inset Newline newline
46322 \begin_inset Flex URL
46325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46327 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46335 \begin_layout Bibliography
46336 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46337 LatexCommand bibitem
46343 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46346 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46350 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46351 \begin_inset Newline newline
46355 \begin_inset Flex URL
46358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46360 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46368 \begin_layout Bibliography
46369 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46370 LatexCommand bibitem
46376 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46379 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46383 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46384 \begin_inset Newline newline
46388 \begin_inset Flex URL
46391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46393 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46401 \begin_layout Bibliography
46402 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46403 LatexCommand bibitem
46409 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46412 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46416 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46417 \begin_inset Newline newline
46421 \begin_inset Flex URL
46424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46426 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46434 \begin_layout Bibliography
46435 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46436 LatexCommand bibitem
46442 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46445 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46449 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46450 \begin_inset Newline newline
46454 \begin_inset Flex URL
46457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46459 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46467 \begin_layout Bibliography
46468 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46469 LatexCommand bibitem
46475 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46478 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46482 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46483 \begin_inset Newline newline
46487 \begin_inset Flex URL
46490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46492 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46500 \begin_layout Bibliography
46501 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46502 LatexCommand bibitem
46508 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46511 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46515 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46516 \begin_inset Newline newline
46520 \begin_inset Flex URL
46523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46525 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46533 \begin_layout Bibliography
46534 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46535 LatexCommand bibitem
46541 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46544 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46548 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46549 \begin_inset Newline newline
46553 \begin_inset Flex URL
46556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46558 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46566 \begin_layout Bibliography
46567 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46568 LatexCommand bibitem
46574 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46577 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46581 about new features in
46586 \begin_inset Newline newline
46590 \begin_inset Flex URL
46593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46595 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46603 \begin_layout Standard
46604 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46638 \begin_inset Note Note
46641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46648 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46649 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46650 bibliography is the second one:
46658 \begin_layout Standard
46659 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46660 LatexCommand bibtex
46661 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46662 options "biblio/alphadin"
46669 \begin_layout Standard
46670 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46673 \begin_layout Standard
46674 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46675 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46681 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46682 LatexCommand printindex